Sei sulla pagina 1di 206

SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions

ShopMill

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

12.2001 Edition

Hardware

Installation and Start-Up

Supplementary Conditions

PLC Program

Signal Description

ShopMill

Machine Data

Description of Functions

Reserved Functions

Tools

Tool Management

Measuring Cycles

10

Network Link

11

Access Protection

12

Miscellaneous

13

Abbreviations

References

Index

SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Valid for
Control
Software version
SINUMERIK 840D
6
SINUMERIK 840DE (export version) 6
SINUMERIK 840D powerline
6
SINUMERIK 840DE powerline
6
SINUMERIK 810D
4
SINUMERIK 810DE (export version) 4
SINUMERIK 810D powerline
4
SINUMERIK 810DE powerline
4

12.01 Edition

SINUMERIKR Documentation
Printing history
Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.
The status of each edition is shown by the code in the Remarks columns.
Status code in the Remarks column:
A . . . . . New documentation.
B . . . . . Unrevised reprint with new Order No.
C . . . . . Revised edition with new status.
If factual changes have been made on the page within the same
software version, this is indicated by a new edition coding in the
header on that page.
Edition
10.97
11.98
03.99
08.00
12.01

Order No.
6FC5 297-2AD80-0BP0
6FC5 297-2AD80-0BP1
6FC5 297-5AD80-0BP0
6FC5 297-5AD80-0BP1
6FC5 297-6AD80-0BP0

Remarks
A
C
C
C
C

This manual is included in the documentation available on CD-ROM (DOCONCD)


Edition
Order No.
Remarks
01.02
6FC5 298-6CA00-0BG2
C
Registered Trademarks
SIMATICr, SIMATIC HMIr, SIMATIC NETr, SIROTECr, SINUMERIKr and SIMODRIVEr are trademarks of
Siemens. Other names used in this publications may be trademarks of their respective owners and their
use by third parties may constitute a violation of copyright.

Further information is available on the Internet under:


http://www.ad.siemens.de/sinumerik.

Other functions not described in this documentation might be


executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an
obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when
servicing.

This publication was produced with Interleaf V7.


The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders
will be liable for damages. All rights, including riths created by patent
grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.

We have checked that the contents of this publication agree with the
hardware and software described here. Nevertheless, differences
might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are
completely identical. The information given in this publication is
reviewed at regular intervals and any corrections that might be
necessary are made in the subsequent printings. Suggestions for
improvement are welcome at all times.

E Siemens AG, 1997--2001. All rights reserved

Subject to changes without prior notice.

Order No. 6FC5 297-6AD80-0BP0


Printed in Germany

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Preface

Structure of
documentation

The SINUMERIK documentation is divided into 3 different levels:

S General Documentation
S User Documentation
S Manufacturer/Service Documentation

Target group

This document is intended for the manufacturers of vertical machining centers


or universal milling machines incorporating SINUMERIK 810D/840D.

Objective

The Installation and Start-up Guide provides you with all the relevant information required to configure, install and start-up ShopMill.

Note
This Description of Functions is valid for ShopMill SW 6.2 with:

S SINUMERIK 810D (SW 4.3 and later)


S SINUMERIK 840D (SW 6.3 and later)

SINUMERIK 840D
powerline

Improved-performance variants SINUMERIK 840D powerline and SINUMERIK


840DE powerline will be available from 09.2001. For a list of available powerline
modules, please refer to the following Hardware Description:
References:
/PHD/, Configuring Manual SINUMERIK 840D.

SINUMERIK 810D
powerline

Improved-performance variants SINUMERIK 810D powerline and SINUMERIK


810DE powerline will be available from 12.2001. For a list of available powerline
modules, please refer to the following Hardware Description:
References:
/PHC/, Configuring Manual SINUMERIK 810D.

Standard scope

This document provides information about the control system design and the
interfaces of the individual components. It also describes the start-up and installation procedure for ShopMill with SINUMERIK 810D/840D.
For detailed information about individual functions, function assignment and
performance data of individual components, please refer to the appropriate document for the subject concerned (e.g. manuals, function descriptions etc.).
User-oriented activities such as the creation of part programs and control operating procedures are described in detail in separate documents.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

Preface

12.01

Further descriptions of tasks to be performed by the machine tool manufacturer


are also available for the standard SINUMERIK 810D/840D. We may refer to
them in this manual if appropriate.

Searching aids

In addition to the table of contents, we have provided the following information


in the appendix for your assistance:
1. Index of abbreviations
2. List of references
3. Index
For a complete list and description of the ShopMill alarms, please refer to
References:

/BAS/, ShopMill Operators Guide.

The SINUMERIK 810D/840D alarms are also listed in


References:

/DA/, Diagnostics Guide.

For further useful information on start-up and troubleshooting, please refer to


References:

Notes

/FB/, D1, Diagnostics Tools.

The following symbols with special significance are used in the documentation:

Note
This symbol appears in this document to draw your attention to information
relevant to the subject in hand.

Warnings

The following warnings with varying levels of severity are used in this document:

vi

Danger
This symbol indicates that death, grievous injury or substantial property damage will occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.

Warning
This symbol indicates that death, grievous injury or substantial property damage may occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Preface

12.01

Caution
This symbol used with de safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

Caution
This symbol used without de safety alert symbol indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.

Notice
This symbol used without de safety alert symbol indicates a potentially situation
which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or state.

Technical information

Trademarks

IBM is a registered trademark of the International Business Corporation.


MS-DOS and WINDOWST are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.

Notations

The following notations and abbreviations are used in this document:

S PLC interface signals --> IS Signal name (signal data)


Example:
--

NST base_sig.reset (DB82, DBX4.0) i.e. the signal is stored in data


block 82, data byte 4, bit 0.

S Machine data --> MD: NUMBER, MD_NAME (English designation)


S Setting data --> SD: NUMBER, SD_NAME (English designation)
S The symbol means corresponds to.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

vii

Preface

12.01

Notes

viii

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Contents
1

Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-13

1.1

Hardware assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-13

1.2

Examples for assigning the machine control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-15

Installation and Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-17

2.1

Preconditions for software start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-17

2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4

Initial start-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Starting up ShopMill on a PCU 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting up ShopMill on a PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NC start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-19
2-19
2-22
2-27
2-29

2.3

Series start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-31

Supplementary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-33

PLC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-35

4.1

Structure of the PLC program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-35

4.2

Example for OB1 and OB100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-36

4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2

Overview of blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-39
4-39
4-40

4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3

Description of blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShopMill PLC program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShopMill interface DB82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics function for start-up purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-41
4-41
4-42
4-44

4.5

Standard interface signals for/from ShopMill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-45

Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-47

5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3

Overview of ShopMill interface DB82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Signals to ShopMill (input signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signals from ShopMill (output signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics buffer signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-47
5-47
5-48
5-49

5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3

Description of ShopMill interface DB82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Signals to ShopMill (input signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signals from ShopMill (output signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of diagnostics buffer signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-51
5-51
5-60
5-67

Machine Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-69

6.1

NC machine data for ShopMill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-69

6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2

Display machine data for ShopMill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Overview of machine data display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of display machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-72
6-72
6-74

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

ix

Contents

12.01

Reserved Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-87

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-89

8.1

Tool-changing cycle adapting to the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-90

8.2

Manual tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-92

8.3

Switching on spindle and coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-93

8.4

Activate tool-specific M functions 1...4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-94

8.5
8.5.1
8.5.2

Modify texts for tool-specific functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


PCU 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-96
8-96
8-98

Tool Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-101

9.1

Overview of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-101

9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5

Start-up of the tool management in the NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Start-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering the NC machine data for tool management . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the NC machine data for tool management . . . . . . . . .
Creating and loading the configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering display machine data for tool management . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-104
9-104
9-105
9-107
9-112
9-118

9.3
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4

Tool management start-up in the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-119
9-119
9-120
9-121
9-123

9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 1: Machine with disk-type magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 2: Machine with chain magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-130
9-130
9-133

9.5
9.5.1
9.5.2

Configuring the operator interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


To modify the standard lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an additional list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-136
9-136
9-140

Measuring Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-143

10.1

Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-143

10.2

Probe connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-144

10.3

Functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-146

10.4
10.4.1

Start-up sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-up flowchart for probe activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-148
10-148

10.5
10.5.1
10.5.2

Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Machine data for adapting the probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display machine data for measuring cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-151
10-151
10-152

Network Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-157

11.1

General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-157

11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2

Linking Windows network drives to ShopMill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


PCU 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-158
11-158
11-159

10

11

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

Contents

12.01

12

Access Protection via Password and Keyswitch


.....................................................................

12-161

12.1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-161

12.2

Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-163

12.3

Keyswitch positions (DB10, DBX56.4 to 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-164

12.4

Machine data for protection levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-165

Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-167

13.1
13.1.1
13.1.2

Configuring the customer booting display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


PCU 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-167
13-167
13-168

13.2
13.2.1
13.2.2

Configuring the user screenform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Linking user-configured cycles into the machining plan . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incorporating own measuring cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-169
13-170
13-171

13.3
13.3.1
13.3.2

Cylinder surface transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of how to set an axis configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-172
13-172
13-173

13.4

Swivel heads and tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-176

13.5

Multiple clamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-178

13.6

ISO dialects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-179

13.7

Spindle control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-180

13.8

Automatically generated programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-181

13.9
13.9.1

ShopMill Open (PCU 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Basic menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-182
13-182

13.10

Cycles/measuring cycles support in the G code editor . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-183

13.11

User status display (PCU 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-184

13.12

OP hotkeys, PLC keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-186

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-187

References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-191

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-203

13

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

xi

Contents

12.01

Notes

xii

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

Hardware
1.1

Hardware assembly

System assembly

Hardware assembly for ShopMill is as standard for SINUMERIK 810D/840D.


References:

Table 1-1

/PHC/, SINUMERIK 810D, Configuring Manual


/IAC/, SINUMERIK 810D, Installation & Start-Up Guide
/PHD/, SINUMERIK 840D, Configuring Manual
NCU 561.2-573.3
/IAD/, SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D,
Installation & Start-Up Guide

Basic components

Basic components

Order number

Remarks

CCU1 (810D)

6FC5410-0AY01-0AA0

Export version

CCU3 (810D)

6FC5410-0AY03-1AA0

Export version

NCU571.3 (840D)

6FC5357-0BB11-0AE1

NCU572.3 (840D)

6FC5357-0BB22-0AE0

NCU573.3 (840D)

6FC5357-0BB33-0AE2

Table 1-2

Operator components

Operator components

Order number

Remarks

OP010 operator panel

6FC5203-0AF00-0AA0

OP010C operator panel

6FC5203-0AF01-0AA0

OP010S operator panel

6FC5203-0AF04-0AA0

OP015 operator panel

6FC5203-0AF03-0AA0

PCU 20 with system software

6FC5210-0DF00-0AA0

166 MHz, 16 MB

PCU 50 with system software

6FC5210-0DF02-0AA0

333 MHz, 128 MB

19 machine control panel

6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0

Standard layout/US layout

Key cap for


19 machine control panel

6FC5148-0AA1j-0AA0

j = 4: 16, transparent with stickers


j = 3: 90, gray

Full OP032S CNC keyboard

6FC5203-0AC00-1AA0

Standard/US layout

Machine control panel OP032S

6FC5203-0AD10-1AA0

Standard/US layout

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

1-13

1 Hardware
1.1
Hardware assembly

Table 1-2

12.01

Operator components

Key cap for OP032S CNC full


6FC5248-0AA02-0AA0
keyboard and OP032S machine
control panel
Mini handheld unit

1-14

Standard/US layout

6FX2007-1AD00

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

1 Hardware
Examples for assigning the machine control panel

12.01
1.2

1.2

Examples for assigning the machine control panel


To facilitate start-up, you can call module FC90 in OB1 with the following key
assignments:

S for 19 machine control panel with source file FC90_MCP19


S for the machine control panel of the OP032S with source file FC90_OP32S
Keys assigned by ShopMill via the DB82 are grayed out.
Symbols are available in the keyboard cover set (see Section 1.1 Hardware
Assembly) for keys to .

Example for
assignment of the
MCP 19

100

[.]
10

1000 10000

Fig. 1-1

10

--

12

11

19 machine control panel

Jog mode MANUAL

Automatic mode AUTO

Tool Offset -- Tool operating area

Program Manager -- Directory operating area

Alarm -- Alarms operating area

Program -- Program operating area

Spindle rotation counter-clockwise (M4) and Spindle Start

Spindle Stop (M5)

Spindle rotation clockwise (M3) and Spindle Start

Reset

11

Cycle Stop

12

Cycle Start

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

1-15

1 Hardware
1.2
Examples for assigning the machine control panel

12.01

Example for
assignment of the
MCP for OP032S

1
7

2
10
11

Fig. 1-2

12

Machine control panel for OP032S

Jog mode MANUAL

Automatic mode AUTO

Spindle rotation counter-clockwise (M4) and Spindle Start

Spindle Stop (M5)

Spindle rotation clockwise (M3) and Spindle Start

Reset

11

Cycle Stop

12

Cycle Start

Note
The operating areas for tool, directory, alarms and program can be selected via
hard keys on the CNC keyboard for OP032S.

1-16

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Installation and Start-Up


2.1

Preconditions for software start-up

Data
communication

For data communication, you require:

S Hardware
--

Programming device, e.g. a PG 740 or a PC with MPI module

--

Cable for RS-232 PG/PC-NC (Order No.: 6FX2 002-1AA01-0BF0)

--

Cable for MPI bus (Order No.: 6ES7 901-0BF00-0AA0)

--

PCMCIA card (for series start-up via PCMCIA card)


This PCMCIA card can be used for the NCU/CCU or for the PCU. The
PCMIA card is referred to by the following terms for easier distinction in
the start-up sections:
--

for the NCU/CCU NC card

--

for the PCU PC card

S Software

ShopMill
software package

--

SIMATIC Step7, SW 4 and later (see SIMATIC catalog for order number)

--

PCIN (Order No. see Catalog NC Z)

--

SINUCOPY-FFS for PC card or NC card

The ShopMill software package to be installed comprises the following:

S System disks (one each for PCU20 and PCU 50)


S Application disks (for PCU 20 only)
S ShopMill toolbox (cycles, machine data, setting data)
S ShopMill PLC Toolbox (PLC programs)
The floppy disks are available on the ShopMill CD-ROM. The files must be
copied to the hard disk of a PC/PG. The procedure for further installation of the
software on PCU and NC/PC is described in the following sections on installation and start-up.
The ShopMill CD-ROM also includes the NC standard software releases for
Sinumerik 810D/840D. These can be loaded onto a PCMIA card via SINUCOPY-FFS.

Note
The exact contents of the ShopMill CD-Rom can be found in file siemensd.txt
(German) or siemense.txt (English).
You can find a compatibility list in file compat.xls.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

2-17

2 Installation and Start-Up


2.1
Preconditions for software start-up

System disks

12.01

The system disks contain the system software for the two PCUs; for PCU 50 in
5 language, for PCU 20 in the languages ENGLISH and GERMAN, where
ENGLISH is the foreground language.

Note
Before installing the contents of the system disks, please read the SW/HW replacement description in the Installation and Start-Up Guide for the SINUMERIK
810D or SINUMERIK 840D and the instructions in file Sys_read.txt on the system
disk.

Application disks

The application software allows you to modify the parameters of the PCU 20
applications and thus to:
--

Select languages

--

Change tool-specific cursor texts (cust.txt)

--

Alter display machine data and

--

Change the MPI parameters (NETNAMES.INI)

--

Load alarm text files

Note
Before installing the contents of the application disks, please read the SW/HW replacement description in the Installation and Start-Up Guide for the SINUMERIK
810D or SINUMERIK 840D and the instructions in file App_read.txt on the application disk.

Toolbox disks

The Toolbox contains the following ShopMill data:


--

ShopMill machine data blocks

--

Cycles, definitions (macros, GUD) and examples

--

Configuration files for the tool management function

The PLC Toolbox contains the ShopMill library which comprises


--

the modules of the ShopMill-PLC program

--

the modules of the basic standard program for SINUMERIK 840D/810D

--

STL sources for tool management, machine control panel and OBs

The other Toolbox disks include the NC-VAR selector and are the same as the
standard Toolbox disks of the SINUMERIK 840D/810D system.

Note
Please read the information in file siemensd.txt (German) or siemense.txt
(English) in the PLC Toolbox.

2-18

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12.01
2.2

2.2

2 Installation and Start-Up


Initial start-up sequence

Initial start-up sequence

Please proceed as follows for installing and starting up the NC:


1. PCU
2. NC
3. PLC

2.2.1

Starting up ShopMill on a PCU 20

Installation via the


PC card
Installing the system disks on PC/PG

1. Call program sys_inst from system disk 1.


2. Select option <1> Install System disk on hard disk.
3. Specify the drive on which you wish to install the system disks.
4. Specify the directory in which you wish to install the system
disks. sys_inst suggests \pcu20.sys. You can change this if
necessary.
5. sys_inst may require you to insert the 2nd system disk.
6. Exit the program with <ESC>.

Installing the application disks on a PC/PG

1. Call program app_inst from application disk 1.


2. Specify the drive on which you wish to install the application
disks.
3. Specify the directory in which you wish to install the application disks. app_inst suggests \pcu20.app. You can change
this if necessary.
4. app_inst may require you to insert the 2nd application disk.
5. Exit the program with <ESC>.

Fig. 2-1

Installing on a PC/PG

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

2-19

2 Installation and Start-Up


2.2
Initial start-up sequence

12.01

Installing the application disks on PC card

1. Switch to the directory instutil of the application software (e.g.


\pcu20.app\instutil (the directory specified during installation of
the application disks on the PC/PG).
2. Call app_inst.
3. You may change the configuration as required (e.g. user texts,
PLC texts, alarms, select languages, select modules for
installation, etc.).
4. Return to the main menu by pressing Esc.
5. Select option <1> Install all modules on hardware.
6. Select option <2> Create Flash Memory Card image.
7. Specify the source directory in which file sys_inst is stored.
8. Specify the target directory to which you wish to copy the
system/application image file.
File PCU20.ABB is created.
9. Insert the PC card into the PCMCIA slot of the PC/PG.
10. Transfer the created image file to the PC card using
SINUCOPY-FFS.

Fig. 2-2

Creating a PC card

Note
You do not need to separately copy the system software to the PC card as it is
copied over automatically with the application software.

2-20

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12.01
2.2

2 Installation and Start-Up


Initial start-up sequence

Loading the PC card to the PCU 20

1. Switch off the control.


2. Insert a PC card with new PCU SW release.
3. Switch on the control.
4. Press key 6 when the message PCU 20 Boot Software
appears on the screen while the PCU 20 is booting.
5. Select option <0> Update from PC Card.
6. When data comparison has been completed, the message:
Remove PC card appears.
7. On removal of the PC card, the control boots and starts up
automatically.

Fig. 2-3

Loading the PC card to the PCU 20

For instructions on how to upgrade the HMI software on PCU HW, please refer
to the HMI Installation and Start-Up Guide for SINUMERIK 840D/810D.
References:

/IAM/, HMI Installation & Start-up Guide,


IM2 Installation and Start-Up of HMI Embedded

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

2-21

2 Installation and Start-Up


2.2
Initial start-up sequence

2.2.2

12.01

Starting up ShopMill on a PCU 50

When you install ShopMill on the PCU 50, you can choose the ShopMill variant
you wish to use, i.e. ShopMill Classic or ShopMill Open. ShopMill Classic is the
software package previously marketed under the name ShopMill. For information about ShopMill Open, please refer to Section 13.9 ShopMill Open.

Note
ShopMill uses the alarm texts and PLC messages of the standard operator
interface. For detailed information, please refer to the following publications:
References:
/IAC/, Installation Guide 810D
/IAD/, Installation Guide 840D.

Installation via the


RS-232 interface
(FAT 32)
Preconditions:

1. The interlnk.exe application must be installed on the PC/PG.


2. The following line must be present in the config.sys file of the
PC/PG:
device = [path]\interlnk.exe /auto
([path] = path of interlnk.exe file, e.g. c:\programs)

3. Connect the PCU 50 (X6) to the serial or parallel interface on


the PC/PG.

Activate the PCU 50:

4. Switch on the control and when the message Sinumerik


appears as the PCU50 is booting, press the Cursor down key
and then Enter.

5. Select option <8> Start PC Link.


6. Enter password.
7. Intersvr opens.

Fig. 2-4

2-22

Installation via the RS-232 interface (FAT 32)

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12.01
2.2

2 Installation and Start-Up


Initial start-up sequence

1
Installing the software:

8. Restart the PC/PG.


9. Copy the contents of the system disk on the Windows
interface of the PC/PG to d:\install on the PCU 50. Do not
copy over the disk directories themselves.
Note:
Once the PC/PG has rebooted, the PCU 50 displays the drive on
the PC/PG which corresponds to drive D on the PCU 50, (e.g. D:
equals F:, i.e. the files must be copied to drive F).

10. Close Intersvr on the PCU 50 with Alt+F4.


11. Installation is menu-driven.
12. Select the ShopMill variant.

Fig. 2-5

Installation via the RS-232 interface (FAT 32)

Installation via
floppy disk drive

1. Switch on the control and when the message Sinumerik


appears as the PCU 50 is booting, press the Cursor down key
and then Enter.

2. Select Option <1> Install/Update SINUMERIK System.


3. Enter password.
4. Select option <1> Install from Floppy Disk.
5. Insert the first disk and follow the menu.
Note:
You must copy the files to drive F.

6. Select the ShopMill variant.


7. After installing the software, power down the PCU 50 with Exit
and then reboot it again.

Fig. 2-6

Installation via floppy disk drive

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

2-23

2 Installation and Start-Up


2.2
Initial start-up sequence

Installation via
network link

12.01

The SW is first transferred from the PC/PG to D:\Install on the PCU 50 and then
automatically installed when the PCU 50 next boots.
In the example given below, the PC/PG has computer number r3344 and the
SW to be installed is stored in directory SHOPMILL\SM_INST.

Preconditions:

S PC/PG with Windows NT4 or Windows95/98


S Set protocol NETBBEUI on the PC/PG
Start --> Settings--> Control Panel --> Network -->
Configuration tab --> Add: NETBEUI pro

S Determine the computer name of the PC/PG:


Start --> Settings --> Control Panel --> Network -->
Identification tab --> Computer Name: e.g. r3344

S Share the directory on the PC/PG in which the SW to


be installed is stored:
PC/PG with Windows NT4:
Assign a share name (e.g. SHOPMILL)
Enter share authorization (e.g. User1 [llocal user] or
anyone with read access)
PC/PG with Windows 95/98
Enter a share name (e.g. SHOPMILL)
Enter access authorization
assign password if necessary

S Select share level on a PC/PG with 95/98:


Start --> Settings --> Control Panel --> Network -->
Access Control tab --> Select Share Level

S Connect the PC/PG and PCU 50 using an Ethernet


cable of type Converted Twisted Pair

Activate the PCU 50:


1. Switch on the control and when the message
Sinumerik appears as the PCU 50 is booting, press
the Cursor down key and then Enter.
2. Select Option <1> Install/Update SINUMERIK
System.
3. Enter password.
4. Select option <3> Install from Network Drive.
5. Select option <1> Connect to Network Drive.

Fig. 2-7

2-24

Installation via a network link

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12.01
2.2

2 Installation and Start-Up


Initial start-up sequence

Make connection to the PC/PG:


6. Enter a user name and password with which the SW
can be fetched from the shared directory on the PC/PG
(password entry can be confirmed).
PC/PG with Windows NT4:
User name and password of a local user of the PC/PG.
PC/PG with Windows 95/98:
Optional user name, password identical to password
specified for shared directory (if applicable).
7. Enter drive letter under which the PC/PG is displayed
on the PCU 50.
E.g.: H
8. Enter the computer name of the PC/PG and directory
name (share name) of the PC/PG to be accessed.
E.g.: \\r3344\Shopmill
9. The following message appears on the PCU 50:
Connected Network Drive (last):
H: (\\r3344\SHOPMILL)
Install Directory: F:\Install
Note:
F:\Install is a default setting and can/must be changed.
10. Select option <4> Change Install Directory.
11. Enter drive letter under which the PC/PG is displayed
on the PCU 50 and a subdirectory if applicable.
E.g.: H:\SM_INST

Start transmission and SW installation:


12. Select option <5> Install from H:\SM_INST.
13. The SW transfer from the PC/PG to D:\INSTALL on the
PCU 50 commences.
After the SW has been transferred, the PCU 50 is automatically restarted and the transferred SW is installed
menu-driven.
14. Select the ShopMill variant.

Fig. 2-8

Installation via a network link

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

2-25

2 Installation and Start-Up


2.2
Initial start-up sequence

12.01

If you want to display all connected drives, proceed as follows:

1. Switch on the control and when the message


Sinumerik appears as the PCU 50 is booting, press
the Cursor down key and then Enter.
2. Select Option <1> Install/Update SINUMERIK
System.
3. Enter password.
4. Select option <3> Install from Network Drive.
5. Select option <2> Show connected Network Drives.

Fig. 2-9

Show connected drives

If you want to disconnect from all network drives again, proceed as follows:

1. Switch on the control and when the message


Sinumerik appears as the PCU 50 is booting, press
the Cursor down key and then Enter.
2. Select Option <1> Install/Update SINUMERIK
System.
3. Enter password.
4. Select option <3> Install from Network Drive.
5. Select option <3> Disconnect from all Network Drives.

Fig. 2-10

Language

2-26

Disconnect from network drives

The ShopMill software package includes 5 languages (German, English,


French, Italian and Spanish).
The foreground language is always German.
To select the background language, press the softkeys MMC and Languages
in succession in the Start-up operating area on the CNC ISO operator interface and mark the desired language.
Use the Change Language softkey to toggle between the foreground and
background language in the Start-up area of the CNC ISO operator interface.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

2 Installation and Start-Up


Initial start-up sequence

12.01
2.2

2.2.3

NC start-up
Please proceed as follows for installing and starting up the NC:

Yes

Is the software version installed on


the NC?
No

Preconditions:
NC card with 8 MB memory and required
NCK software release

Insert the NC card


Load the software to RAM
-- Start-up switch=1 (reset NCK)
-- Start-up switch=0 (NCK reset)

Enter password for the machine


manufacturer

Load standard MD for milling from directory


tools\md\...
MVAR3A1S.8X0 (3 axes/1 spindle)
MVAR4A1S.8X0 (4 axes/1 spindle)

NCK reset
Load standard MD for milling from directory tools\md\...
MVAR3A1S.8X0 (3 axes/1 spindle)
MVAR4A1S.8X0 (4 axes/1 spindle)

Machine

Test configuration without drives

Configure axes and start


up drives

Load simulation data for


axes from directory
tools\md\SIM.8X0

NCK reset
1

Fig. 2-11

NC start-up

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

2-27

2 Installation and Start-Up


2.2
Initial start-up sequence

12.01

1
Load ShopMill MD from directory
tools\md\CMM.8X0
Note:
This file also contains the MD for TOOLMAN, which may have to be adapted to
the machine.
NCK reset
Load definitions from directory:
tools\cycles\define
Activate definitions by selecting
softkey Activate
Load ShopMill cycles from directory:
tools\cycles
Note: After loading, the ShopMill cycles
are stored in directories Standard Cycles
and Manufacturer Cycles.

PCU 50: Load the ShopMill cycles with


Load softkey
NCK reset
Transfer tool management data from directory: tools\sd\....
TM_WO_GR.8X0
(configuration without dual gripper, e.g.
for machine with disk-type magazine)
TM_W_GR.8x0
(configuration with dual gripper, e.g. for
machine with chain magazine)
Note: These data must be adapted if MD
has been modified for tool management

Fig. 2-12

2-28

NC start-up

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12.01
2.2

2.2.4

2 Installation and Start-Up


Initial start-up sequence

PLC start-up
Please proceed as follows for installing and starting up the PLC:

Preconditions:
ShopMill machine data are loaded

Reset memory on the PLC


Memory capacity after reset 96 KB

Install the ShopMill library on PG/PC


(call with install.bat).
Note: The catalog name of the library is
SMxxyyzz (xxyyzz = version number)

All modules and all source files are copied from


the ShopMill library to the PLC user project.

The following source file must be compiled for


the tool management in the PLC user project:
TM_WO_GR.AWL
(data transfer without dual gripper, e.g. for machine with disk-type magazine)
TM_W_GR.AWL
(data transfer with dual gripper, e.g. for machine
with chain magazine)
Note:
The generated modules are stored in the user
area and must be adapted to match the machine.

Supply ShopMill interface DB82 in user program


Part 1
The following source code can be used to do
this:

S FC90_OP32S.AWL
S FC90_MSTT19.AWL
Note: The generated modules are stored in the
user area and must be adapted to match the
machine.

Fig. 2-13

PLC start-up

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

2-29

2 Installation and Start-Up


2.2
Initial start-up sequence

12.01

1
Compile one of the following source files for 840D
or 810D:
S GPOB810D.AWL
S GPOB840D.AWL
Note:
Supplement the machine control panel call
(FC19/24) and assign the parameters for the ShopMill interface DB82 (FC90) in user program Part 1.

Load the project in the PLC

Fig. 2-14

2-30

PLC start-up

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

2 Installation and Start-Up


2.3
Series start-up

12.01

2.3

Series start-up

Application areas

Series start-up is used to

S upgrade or
S to install the software on several machines.
During upgrading, am NC and a PLC archive are created and these restored
after upgrading.
When upgrading several machines, a standard software installation is carried
out on the 1st machine and an NC and a PLC archive created, which is then
restored to the other machines.

Sequence of
operations

When creating or restoring a series start-up archive, you can choose between 5
different storage media:

S RS-232
The start-up archives are saved on a device connected via the RS-232 interface. Please refer to the details for series start-up in the following publication:
References:
/IAD/, Installation and Start-Up Guide
SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital,
Section Data backup via MMC 100.

S NC card
The free memory (approx. 2 MB) on the NC card (PCMCIA card) can be
used to save the start-up archive it contains.

S PG (PCU 50 only)
The start-up archives are saved to a PC.

S Archive (PCU 50 only)


The start-up archives are saved to hard disk.

S Diskette (PCU 50 only)


The start-up archives are saved to diskette.
The exact operating sequence is specified in the following publication:
References:
/BA/, Operators Guide SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC,
Chapter Operating Area Services.

Note
When you create an archive, you can save the NC and PLC separately or
together.
When reading in the archive files, the NC archive must be read in first, then it is
necessary to perform an NCK reset and, if necessary, a PLC initial clear. Then
the PLC archive is read in. Note that all the data of the NC or PLC are deleted
and replaced with those in the archive.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

2-31

2 Installation and Start-Up


2.3
Series start-up

12.01

Notes

2-32

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Supplementary Conditions

Requirements

S ShopMill is only executed in channel 1, mode group 1.


S Up to 5 axes plus a spindle are displayed on the ShopMill operator interface.
S The machine axes are assigned to fixed numbers (1=X, 2=Y, 3=Z).
S The spindle can be assigned to axis numbers 4, 5 or 6.
S ShopMill is only executed with tool management.
S You can only use one operator panel with ShopMill.
S Handheld programming unit (HHU) in addition to ShopMill on PCU 50 on
request only.

S The HMI and Windows screen savers must not be used at the same time.
References:

/IAM/, IM2 Installation and Start-Up of HMI Embedded


IM4 Installation and Start-Up of HMI Advanced.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

3-33

3 Supplementary Conditions

12.01

Notes

3-34

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

PLC Program
4.1

Structure of the PLC program

General

The ShopMill PLC program, tool management and standard basic program
must be called in OBs 1, 40 and 100 as shown in Fig. 4-1.
OB100
Restart

FC100
Tool Management
FB1
Start
User program

OB1
Cyclic
Processing

DBs for

FC2

NCK/Mode
grp./Channel/Spindle

Start
FC34

ShopMill diagnostic module


for start-up purposes
The user program Part 1
includes

S
S

FC24
MCP of
OP032S

alternative

FC19
Standard MCP

Call FC19/24
Parameter assignment for the
ShopMill interface DB82 (FC90).

FC30
ShopMill
PLC
program

DB81
GP_HP
HMI
interface
DB83-88
Data module for
ShopMill PLC program
FC31-33
ShopMill PLC
program

FC90
Parameter assignment for
the ShopMill interface DB 82
DB82
ShopMill
interface
FC35
ShopMill
PLC program
FC9
ASUB
FB4
PI service

FB110, DB110
Tool Management
User program Part 2
OB40
Process alarm

FC3
GP_PRAL

G group
distributor

User program

Fig. 4-1

Structure of the PLC program

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

4-35

4 PLC Program
4.2

12.01

Example for OB1 and OB100

4.2

Example for OB1 and OB100

General

The PLC programs GPOB810D.AWL and GPOB840D.AWL are available in the


ShopMill PLC library. The user can change these accordingly and recompile
them.
The source files contain calls for the standard basic program, the machine control panel, the ShopMill PLC program and the tool management. OB1 and
OB100 are illustrated below, whereby the calls for the ShopMill PLC program
and tool management are marked in bold type. The call sequence for the modules given in the example must not be changed.

Example of OB1

ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB1
VERSION: 5.2
VAR_TEMP
OB1_EV_CLASS:
OB1_SCAN_1:
OB1_PRIORITY:
OB1_OB_NUMBR:
OB1_RESERVED_1:
OB1_RESERVED_2:
OB1_PREV_CYCLE:
OB1_MIN_CYCLE:
OB1_MAX_CYCLE:
OB1_DATE_TIME:

BYTE;
BYTE;
BYTE;
BYTE;
BYTE;
BYTE;
INT;
INT;
INT;
DATE_AND_TIME;

//Data for ShopMill


START_UP:

BOOL;

// INSERT USER LOCAL DATA HERE


// Insert user data from here
END_VAR
BEGIN
// Basic program
CALL FC2;
//
// INSERT USER PROGRAM PART 1 HERE
// Insert user program part 1 from here
//
//First cycle of OB1 store into START_UP
L #OB1_SCAN_1;
L 1;
==I;
= #START_UP;
//
//Machine control panel/Operator panel
L
DB82.DBB0;
L
0;
==I
;
SPB
MOD0;
//small operator panel
L
DB82.DBB0;
L
1;
==I
;

4-36

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

4 PLC Program

12.01
4.2

Example for OB1 and OB100

SPB
MOD1;
//standard operator panel 19
SPA
FC90;
//no operator panel selected
//
MOD0:

//
MOD1:

//
FC90:

CALL FC24(
ModeGroupNo
ChanNo
SpindleIFNo
FeedHold
SpindleHold
SpindleDir
SPA FC90;

:=B#16#1,
:=B#16#1,
:=B#16#5,
:=M100.0,
:=M100.1,
:=M100.2);

CALL FC19(
ModeGroupNo
ChanNo
SpindleIFNo
FeedHold
SpindleHold

:=B#16#1,
:=B#16#1,
:=B#16#5,
:=M100.0,
:=M100.1);

CALL FC90(
SpindleIFNo

:=B#16#5);

//
//
// ShopMill PLC program
CALL FC30(INIT_SD:= #START_UP)
;//Initialize ShopMill PLC program
//Tool Management System
CALL FB110, DB110;
// INSERT USER PROGRAM PART 2 HERE
//Insert user program part 2 from here
END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

4-37

4 PLC Program
4.2

12.01

Example for OB1 and OB100

OB100
example

ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB100
VERSION: 5.2
VAR_TEMP
OB100_EV_CLASS:
OB100_STRTUP:
OB100_PRIORITY:
OB100_OB_NUMBR:
OB100_RESERVED_1:
OB100_RESERVED_2:
OB100_STOP:
OB100_RESERVED_3:
OB100_RESERVED_4:
OB100_DATE_TIME:
END_VAR

BYTE;
BYTE;
BYTE;
BYTE;
BYTE;
BYTE;
WORD;
WORD;
WORD;
DATE_AND_TIME;

BEGIN
//Tool Management System
CALL FC100( RealMagLoc :=30);
//Number of locations in real magazine
//
//Basic program
CALL FB1 , DB7(
MCPNum
MCP1In
MCP1Out
MCP1StatSend
MCP1StatRec
MCP1BusAdr
MCP1Timeout
MCP1Cycl
MCPMPI
NCCyclTimeout
NCRunupTimeout
NCKomm

:=1,
:=P#E0.0,
:=P#A0.0,
:=P#A8.0
:=P#A12.0,
:=14,
:=S5T#700MS,
:=S5T#200MS,
:=TRUE,
:=S5T#200MS,
:=S5T#50S,
:=TRUE);

// INSERT USER PROGRAM HERE


//Insert user program from here
END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK

Note
The OB100 example applies to the SINUMERIK 810D. On the SINUMERIK
840D, the value of MCP1BusAdr:=6 and MCPMPI: is FALSE.

4-38

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

4 PLC Program

12.01
4.3

4.3

Overview of blocks

4.3.1

Function blocks

Overview of blocks

The following list shows the function blocks used by ShopMill.


Table 4-1
Block

Function blocks for ShopMill


Comment

FC30

ShopMill PLC program; is called in OB1.

FC31--33

ShopMill PLC program; are only loaded.

FC34

Diagnostics block for monitoring the standard interface signals written by the ShopMill PLC program; can be called for diagnostics purposes in OB1.

FC35

ShopMill PLC program; is only loaded.

FC90

Supplies the ShopMill interface DB82; can be called in OB1.

FC100

Sample block for the configuration of tool management


function; called in OB100.

FB20

HiGraphErrEmitterFB block for errors and monitoring time; is only


loaded.

FB110

Sample block for transfer of tool management data; called in OB1.

Note

S The numbers of the function blocks FC30--35 must not be changed. This
means that the blocks with these numbers already allocated by the user
program must be changed.

S Block FB20 is loaded only. It must be available in the automation system


(AS) during operation. A block call is not required.

S The blocks for tool management are described in Chapter 9 Tool Management. When using the tool management on a machine for the first time,
please note that the tool management uses data blocks DB71--DB74; these
data blocks cannot be assigned by the user PLC basic program.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

4-39

4 PLC Program
4.3

4.3.2

12.01

Overview of blocks

Data blocks
The data blocks used by ShopMill are listed below:
Table 4-2

Data blocks for ShopMill


Block

Comment

DB81

HMI interface

DB82

ShopMill interface

DB83--87

Data blocks for ShopMill PLC program

DB110

Instance data block for FB110

Note
The numbers of the data blocks DB81--87 must not be changed. This means
that the blocks with these numbers already allocated by the user program must
be changed.

4-40

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

4 PLC Program

12.01
4.4

4.4

Description of blocks

4.4.1

ShopMill PLC program

FC30...35

Description of blocks

The function blocks FC30...35 control the machine control panel functionality in
DB82 and the HMI functionality in DB81.
ShopMill is much more than just an operator interface consisting of screen
forms and images; in addition, it offers a complete operator system providing the
user with the necessary functions for each control state. For example, the ShopMill operation mode Manual is not identical to the NCK operating mode JOG.
For example, in order to execute the functions Zero point Workpiece, Measure tool, Positioning, etc. in Manual, ShopMill switches automatically at NC
Start to NC operating mode Automatic and back again to JOG mode at the
end of the function or at NC Stop. Thus from the operators point of view, the
manual functions are independent of the control operating modes of the NC.
This functionality, which is continued in the ShopMill Automatic mode, is implemented at the PCU (ShopMill user interface) and in the PLC (ShopMill PLC program FC30).

FC90

The following sample source files are available in the ShopMill library for parameter assignment to the ShopMill interface DB82:

S FC90_MSTT19.AWL (key assignment for MCP19)


S FC90_OP32S.AWL (key assignment for MCP of the OP032S)
Compilation of the above-mentioned STL sources produces the FC90 module.
FC90 can be called in OB1 in Part 1 of the user program.
If FC90 is not used, the following signals must be supplied in DB82:

S DB82 DBB0 (transmission mode for MCP signals)


S DB82 DBB8 (assignment: spindle/axis data record 4 or 5)

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

4-41

4 PLC Program
4.4

4.4.2

12.01

Description of blocks

ShopMill interface DB82

Description of
function

The ShopMill PLC program also requires an interface to the PLC program in
addition to the internal interface to the user interface or to the NC interface. This
is provided in the ShopMill interface DB82.
The machine control panels signals (ShopMill operating modes Reset, Start,
Stop, Spindle clockwise/counter-clockwise/off, etc.) must be input into this interface by PLC user program part 1. The ShopMill PLC program then carries out
the relevant actions and returns the current status to DB82. This can then be
assessed by PLC user program part 2.

Overview for active


ShopMill PLC

The figure below shows the connections for the active ShopMill PLC program.
PCU module

OP032S operator panel

Outputs

Base
signals

MPI bus

HMI
interface

Inputs
IB 0...7
Outputs
QB 0...7

DB81

Data
transfer

ShopMill
PLC
program

User program

Inputs
(keys,
switches)

DB82

FC30

Inputs

Outputs
(indicators, etc.)

ShopMill interface

Active
Standard interface signals

Fig. 4-2

4-42

DB10

DB11

DB21

NC

Mode
group

Channel

ShopMill operation

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

4 PLC Program

12.01
4.4

Description of blocks

Note
When the ShopMill user interface is active, the ShopMill PLC program is also
activated. This is displayed by the output signal DB82 DBX36.0
cmm_plc_activ=1. The ShopMill interface DB82 must be assigned
parameters by the user program. The data transfer of the base signals from
IB0...7/QB0...7 is set via the DB82 DBB0 signal transfer_base_sig. The
default interface signals allocated by the ShopMill PLC program must not be
overwritten by the user.

Interlocking logic
for MCP signals

The interlocking/security logic in the PLC user program for the signals DB82
DBX4.1, base_sig.nc_cycle_start and DB82 DBX9.1, spindle_start must not
be implemented directly in the NCK interface but must act on the associated
input signals in IB0...7 of the MCP.
In addition, the DB21 DBX7.0 signal NC start disable can be activated for an
invalid start.
The interlocking signals must be in the PLC user program Part 1 before
FC19/FC24.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

4-43

4 PLC Program
4.4

12.01

Description of blocks

4.4.3

Diagnostics function for start-up purposes

Description of
function

The diagnostics block FC34 is used to monitor the default signals affected by
the ShopMill PLC program (see Section 4.5 Standard interface signals for/from
ShopMill). These signals must not be altered by the PLC user program. If
changes in the signals take place, the diagnostics block indicates this error in its
circular buffer for error messages (20 entries possible). If a signal is cyclically
changed, a new entry is conducted in the error message buffer in each PLC
cycle. This function is activated via the data block DB82 DBX60.0.

Example
Initialize diagnostics
function

DBX60.0 = 1 (monitor_on)
DBX60.1 = 1 (monitor_initialize)

Activate diagnostics
function

DBX60.0 = 1 (monitor_on)
DBX60.1 = 0 (monitor_initialize)

Acknowledgment
from diagnostics
function

Error message1 (e.g. for DB11DBX0.1)


DBW62
DBB64
DBB65
DBB66

current_number # 0 (error event counter) . . . . . . . . .


db_number (decimal output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
byte_number (decimal output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bit_number (decimal output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
11
0
1

Error message 2 (e.g. for DB21DBX7.1)


DBW68
current_number # 0 (error event counter) . . . . . . . . .
DBB70
db_number (decimal output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DBB71
byte_number (decimal output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DBB72
bit_number (decimal output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
21
7
1

etc.

Call

The function block in OB 1 must be called in the following sequence:


FC2

Basic program block

FC34

Diagnostics block

User program Part 1


(interlocking logic, FC19/24 machine control panel block)
FC30

ShopMill PLC program

FB110

Data transfer block for ShopMill tool management


in standard mode

User program Part 2

Note
The tool box (PLC library) contains the example VAT82 for the variable table.

4-44

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

4 PLC Program

12.01
4.5

4.5

Standard interface signals for/from ShopMill

Standard interface signals for/from ShopMill


A list of the default interface signals affected by the ShopMill PLC program
FC30 is given below.
Table 4-3

Standard interface signals for/from ShopMill


Byte
DB11

Designation
Signals to mode group (PLC-- - - >NCK)

DBB0

Bit0
Bit1
Bit2

AUTOMATIC mode
MDA mode
JOG mode
see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1

DBB1

Bit0
Bit1
Bit2

Machine function TEACH IN


Machine function REPOS
Machine function REF
see /FB1/, Description of Functions Basic Machine, K1

DB19
DBX20

Bit6
DB21

Signals from operator panel (HMI-- - - >PLC)


Simulation active
see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, A2
Signals to NCK channel (PLC-- - - >NCK)

DBB0

Bit5

Activate M01
see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1

DBB0

Bit6

Activate dry run feedrate


see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, V1

DBB1

Bit7

Activate program testing


see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1

DBB2

Bit0

Skip block
see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1

DBB6

Bit2

Delete distance to go
see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, A2

DBB7

Bit1
Bit3
Bit7

NC Start
NC Stop
Reset
see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1

DB3X (X = 4 to 6)
DBB30

Bit0
Bit1
Bit2

DB3X (X = 4 to 6)
DBW86

Signals to spindle (PLC-- - - >NCK)


Spindle Stop
Spindle Start CW rotation
Spindle Start CCW rotation
Signals from spindle (NCK-- - - >PLC)
M function for spindle
see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, S1

Note
If a mode group reset is used by the PLC user program, it must be ensured that
DB82 DBX4.0, base_sig.reset is set simultaneously in the user program.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

4-45

4 PLC Program
4.5

12.01

Standard interface signals for/from ShopMill

Sample
application
Simulation
active

The Simulation active signal is set in ShopMill as well as on the CNC standard
operator interface. This signal can be used, for example, in the user PLC to suppress inhibition of operating mode changes to allow the simulation routine to run
under ShopMill. (An operating mode changeover takes place in the ShopMill
PLC when the simulation run starts.)

4-46

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Signal Description
5.1

Overview of ShopMill interface DB82

5.1.1

Signals to ShopMill (input signals)

Table 5-1
Address

Signals to ShopMill (input signals)


Name

Initial
value

Comment

CMM_IN.transfer_base_sig

B#16#0

Transmission mode for MCP signals

2.0

CMM_IN.base_sig.main_mode_mill.manual

FALSE

ShopMill Manual operating mode

2.1

CMM_IN.base_sig.main_mode_mill.automatic

FALSE

ShopMill Automatic operating mode

4.0

CMM_IN.base_sig.reset

FALSE

RESET for ShopMill

4.1

CMM_IN.base_sig.nc_cycle_start

FALSE

Cycle Start

4.2

CMM_IN.base_sig.nc_cycle_stop

FALSE

Cycle Stop

6.0

CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.tool

FALSE

Tool operating area

6.1

CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.directory

FALSE

Directory operating area

6.2

CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.messages

FALSE

Alarms/Messages operating area

6.3

CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.program

FALSE

Program operating area

6.4

CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.oem1

FALSE

OEM1 operating area

6.5

CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.oem2

FALSE

OEM2 operating area

6.6

CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.customer

FALSE

CUSTOMER operating area

6.7

CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.mda

FALSE

MDA operating area

CMM_IN.spindle_interface_number

B#16#5

Assignment of spindle/axis data record

9.0

CMM_IN.user_defined_spindle_control

FALSE

User-defined spindle control

9.1

CMM_IN.spindle_start

FALSE

Spindle Start

9.2

CMM_IN.spindle_stop

FALSE

Spindle Stop

9.3

CMM_IN.spindle_left

FALSE

Spindle rotation counter-clockwise

9.4

CMM_IN.spindle_right

FALSE

Spindle rotation clockwise

9.5

CMM_IN.program_extern_selected

FALSE

Program is selected in the PLC

9.6

CMM_IN.disable_cnc_standard

FALSE

Disable switchover to CNC ISO operator interface

9.7

CMM_IN.cmm_activ_in_cnc_mode

TRUE

ShopMill PLC active during CNC ISO operation

10.0

CMM_IN.program_test_request

FALSE

Select Program test function

10.1

CMM_IN.dry_run_request

FALSE

Select DryRun function

10.2

CMM_IN.m01_request

FALSE

Select M01 function

10.3

CMM_IN.skip_block_request

FALSE

Select Skip Block function

10.4

CMM_IN.boot_standard

FALSE

System boot on CNC ISO operator interface

10.5

CMM_IN.nck_auto_req

FALSE

Preparation of PLC block search

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5-47

5 Signal Description
5.1

12.01

Overview of ShopMill interface DB82

Table 5-1
Address

Signals to ShopMill (input signals)


Name

Initial
value

Comment

10.6

CMM_IN.spindle_act_m30_reset

FALSE

Spindle active after M30 and reset

10.7

CMM_IN.ignore_nck_alarm

FALSE

Ignore NCK alarm on cycle start

11.1

CMM_IN.get_tool_data

FALSE

Update tool data

11.2

CMM_IN.c_axis_feed_drive

FALSE

This signal is not evaluated by ShopMill

11.3

CMM_IN.select_spindle_readout_0

FALSE

This signal is not evaluated by ShopMill

11.4

CMM_IN.select_spindle_readout_1

FALSE

This signal is not evaluated by ShopMill

12

CMM_IN.ext_m_cmd_1

90

1st extended M command for output of tool-specific M function

13

CMM_IN.ext_m_cmd_2

91

2nd extended M command for output of tool-specific M function

5.1.2
Table 5-2
Address

Signals from ShopMill (output signals)


Signals from ShopMill (output signals)
Name

Initial
value

Comment

30.0

CMM_OUT.base_sig.main_mode_mill.manual

FALSE

ShopMill Manual operating mode

30.1

CMM_OUT.base_sig.main_mode_mill.automatic

FALSE

ShopMill Automatic operating mode

32.0

CMM_OUT.base_sig.reset

FALSE

Reset performed

32.1

CMM_OUT.base_sig.nc_cycle_activ

FALSE

Cycle active

32.2

CMM_OUT.base_sig.nc_cycle_stopped

FALSE

Cycle interrupted

34.0

CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.tool

FALSE

Tool operating area activated

34.1

CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.directory

FALSE

Directory operating area activated

34.2

CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.messages

FALSE

Alarms/messages operating area activated

34.3

CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.program

FALSE

Program operating area activated

34.4

CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.oem1

FALSE

OEM1 operating area selected

34.5

CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.oem2

FALSE

OEM2 operating area selected

34.6

CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.customer

FALSE

CUSTOMER operating area selected

34.7

CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.mda

FALSE

MDA operating area selected

36.0

CMM_OUT.cmm_plc_activ

FALSE

ShopMill PLC active

36.1

CMM_OUT.cmm_mmc_active

FALSE

ShopMill user interface active

36.2

CMM_OUT.spindle_start_req

FALSE

Spindle start requested (M3/M4 output to spindle)

36.3

CMM_OUT.spindle_stop_req

FALSE

Spindle stop requested, M5 output to spindle

36.4

CMM_OUT.spindle_right

FALSE

Spindle rotation clockwise preselected

36.5

CMM_OUT.spindle_left

FALSE

Spindle rotation counter-clockwise preselected

36.7

CMM_OUT.ext_prog_sel

FALSE

External program selected for execution

37.0

CMM_OUT.program_selection_done

FALSE

HMI acknowledgement that a program has been


selected

5-48

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5 Signal Description

12.01
5.1

Table 5-2
Address

Overview of ShopMill interface DB82

Signals from ShopMill (output signals)


Name

Initial
value

Comment

37.1

CMM_OUT.program_test_active

FALSE

Program test function is active

37.2

CMM_OUT.dry_run_active

FALSE

DryRun function is active

37.3

CMM_OUT.m01_active

FALSE

M01 function is active

37.4

CMM_OUT.skip_block_activ

FALSE

Skip Block function is active

37.7

CMM_OUT.start_up_activ

FALSE

ShopMill runup active

42.0

CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_1_on

FALSE

Tool-specific M function 1 active

42.1

CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_2_on

FALSE

Tool-specific M function 2 active

42.2

CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_3_on

FALSE

Tool-specific M function 3 active

42.3

CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_4_on

FALSE

Tool-specific M function 4 active

42.4

CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_1_activ

FALSE

Tool-spec. M function 1 active

42.5

CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_2_activ

FALSE

Tool-spec. M function 2 active

42.6

CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_3_activ

FALSE

Tool-spec. M function 3 active

42.7

CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_4_activ

FALSE

Tool-spec. M function 4 active

44

CMM_OUT.mask_number

W#16#0

Current screen number of ShopMill

5.1.3
Table 5-3
Address

Diagnostics buffer signals


Diagnostics buffer signals
Name

Initial
value

Comment

60.0

nck_signal_monitor.monitor_on

FALSE

Activate diagnostics function


(input signal)

60.1

nck_signal_monitor.monitor_initialize

FALSE

Initialize diagnostics function


(input signal)

62

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1].current_number

W#16#0

Current number of error message 1


(output signal)

64

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1].db_number

B#16#0

DB number of error message 1


(output signal)

65

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1].byte_number

B#16#0

Byte number of error message 1


(output signal)

66

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1].bit_number

B#16#0

Bit number of error message 1


(output signal)

68

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[2].current_number

W#16#0

Current number of error message 2


(output signal)

70

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[2].db_number

B#16#0

DB number of error message 2


(output signal)

71

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[2].byte_number

B#16#0

Byte number of error message 2


(output signal)

72

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[2].bit_number

B#16#0

Bit number of error message 2


(output signal)

.
.
.

.
.
.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5-49

5 Signal Description
5.1

12.01

Overview of ShopMill interface DB82

Table 5-3
Address

Diagnostics buffer signals


Name

Initial
value

Comment

176

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[20].current_number

W#16#0

Current number of error message 20


(output signal)

178

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[20].db_number

B#16#0

DB number of error message 20


(output signal)

179

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[20].byte_number

B#16#0

Byte number of error message 20


(output signal)

180

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[20].bit_number

B#16#0

Bit number of error message 20


(output signal)

5-50

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5 Signal Description

12.01
5.2

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

5.2

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

5.2.1

Signals to ShopMill (input signals)

DB82
DBB0
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal meaning

transfer_base_sig
Transmission mode for MCP signals
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This signal specifies whether the base signals with the structure base_sig are to be used
from the I/O area of the flat, slimline operator panel (OP032S) or from the standard slimline
operator panel (OP031), i.e. the ShopMill PLC automatically copies these I/O signals to
DB82.
Value:
0
Standard assignment; connection of a narrow-profile slimline operator panel MCP
(OP032S)
1
Connection of an MCP of standard slimline operator panel (OP031)
2
Base signals are not transferred; base signals must be transferred by
the operator!

Note

see Subsection 4.4.2 ShopMill interface DB 82

DB82
DBX2.0
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

base_sig.main_mode_mill.manual
ShopMill Manual operating mode
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning
Corresponding to...
Note
References

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
Manual operating mode (Softkey Machine manual) is activated in ShopMill via this signal.
DB82.DBB0
Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set
/BAS/, ShopMill Operators Guide

DB82
DBX2.1
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

base_sig.main_mode_mill.automatic
ShopMill Automatic operating mode
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning
Corresponding to...
Note
References

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
Automatic operating mode (Softkey Machine auto) is activated in ShopMill via this signal.
DB82.DBB0
Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set
/BAS/, ShopMill Operators Guide

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5-51

5 Signal Description
5.2

12.01

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82
DBX4.0
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes
Signal meaning

base_sig.reset
Reset
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
Setting this signal triggers a channel-specific reset and the ShopMill PLC is reset. The
active program is aborted.

Timing diagram
CMM_IN.
reset

Corresponding to ...
Note

CMM_OUT.
At least one PLC cycle set
reset
DB82.DBB0; DB82.DBX32.0, base_sig.reset
Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set

If mode group reset is used by the PLC user program, you must ensure that the
CMM_IN.base_sig.reset signal is set at the same time.

If NC cannot perform a reset, e.g. emergency stop state is active, then there is no
acknowledgment for the CMM_OUT.base_sig.reset signal. In this case the channelspecific reset is present at the NC interface for at least 2 sec.

DB82
DBX4.1
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

base_sig.nc_cycle_start
Cycle Start
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change
0 ------> 1 ------> 0

Corresponding to ...
Note

S ShopMill Automatic operating mode


Start of the selected part program
Note: The ShopMill Automatic operating mode is not identical with NC Automatic mode.
Switching from NC JOG to NC Auto only after Start and internal checking by the ShopMill
state management.
S ShopMill Manual operating mode
According to selected operator function:
-- Start of function in the screen form T, S, M, ...
-- Start of manual Measure tool with probe
-- Start of manual Measure workpiece with probe
-- Start of Positioning
-- Start of Face milling
DB82.DBB0; DB82.DBX32.1, base_sig.nc_cycle_activ
Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set

DB82
DBX4.2
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

base_sig.nc_cycle_stop
Cycle Stop
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change
0 ------> 1
Corresponding to ...
Note

Interruption of active program

5-52

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3

DB82.DBB0; DB82.DBX32.2, base_sig.nc_cycle_stopped


Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5 Signal Description

12.01
5.2

DB82
DBX6.0
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

sub_mode_mill.tool
Tool operating area
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal state 0
Corresponding to ...

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the machine control panel (with OP032S via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard). The appropriate
operating area is displayed in ShopMill when you select this key.
No effect
DB82, DBX34.0, sub_mode_mill.tool

DB82
DBX6.1
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

sub_mode_mill.directory
Directory operating area
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change 0------>1

Signal state 0
Corresponding to ...

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the machine control panel (with OP032S via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard). The appropriate
operating area is displayed in ShopMill when you select this key.
No effect
DB82, DBX34.1, sub_mode_mill.directory

DB82
DBX6.2
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

sub_mode_mill.messages
Alarms/Messages operating area
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change 0------>1

Signal state 0
Corresponding to ...

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This signal can be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the machine
control panel (with OP032S via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard). The appropriate operating area is displayed in ShopMill when you select this key.
No effect
DB82, DBX34.2, sub_mode_mill.messages

DB82
DBX6.3
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

sub_mode_mill.program
Program operating area
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change 0------>1

Signal state 0
Corresponding to ...

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This signal can be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the machine
control panel (with OP032S via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard). The appropriate operating area is displayed in ShopMill when you select this key.
No effect
DB82, DBX34.3, sub_mode_mill.program

DB82
DBX6.4
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

sub_mode_mill.oem1
OEM1 operating area
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change 0------>1

Edge change 0------>1

Signal state 0
Corresponding to ...

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the 19
machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an OP032S
machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in ShopMill when you
select this key.
No effect
DB82, DBX34.4, sub_mode_mill.oem1

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5-53

5 Signal Description
5.2

12.01

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82
DBX6.5
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

sub_mode_mill.oem2
OEM2 operating area
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal state 0
Corresponding to ...

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the 19
machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an OP032S
machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in ShopMill when you
select this key.
No effect
DB82, DBX34.5, sub_mode_mill.oem2

DB82
DBX6.6
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

sub_mode_mill.customer
CUSTOMER operating area
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change 0------>1

Signal state 0
Corresponding to ...

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the 19
machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an OP032S
machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in ShopMill when you
select this key.
No effect
DB82, DBX34.6, sub_mode_mill.customer

DB82
DBX6.7
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

sub_mode_mill.mda
MDA operating area
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change 0------>1

Signal state 0
Note
Corresponding to ...

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the 19
machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an OP032S
machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in ShopMill when you
select this key.
No effect
Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set
DB82, DBX34.7, sub_mode_mill.mda

DB82
DBB8
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

spindle_interface_number
Assignment of spindle/axis data record
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change 0------>1

Signal meaning
Corresponding to...

5-54

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This signal can be used to assign the spindle to an axis data record. Enter the number of
the machine axis.
ShopMill SW release 5.3 and higher: MD 9705 CMM_INDEX_SPINDLE, enter the number
of the channel axis here.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5 Signal Description

12.01
5.2

DB82
DBX9.0
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal state 0

Signal state 1

DB82
DBX9.1
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes
Edge change
0 ------> 1
Signal state 0
Corresponding to ...

DB82
DBX9.2
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

user_defined_spindle_control
User-defined spindle control
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.2, 810D SW 4.2
The spindle control is supported by the ShopMill PLC. Interface signals DB82.DBX9.1 to
DB82.DBX9.4 and DB82.DBX36.2 to DB82.DBX36.5 are active.
Interface signals DB3x.DBX30.0 to DB3x.DBX30.2 are written to the axis DB of the spindle
(see also Section 13.7 Spindle control).
The spindle control is not supported by the ShopMill PLC. Interface signals DB82.DBX9.1
to DB82.DBX9.4 and DB82.DBX36.2 to DB82.DBX36.5 have no function and interface
signals DB3x.DBX30.0 to DB3x.DBX30.2 are not written. The spindle must be controlled in
the user PLC.

spindle_start
Spindle Start
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The spindle starts only when a direction of rotation is selected via interface signals
DB3x.DBX30.1 or DB3x.DBX30.2.
Please refer to Section 13.7 Spindle control.
No effect
DB82, DBX36.2, spindle_start_req
DB82, DBX9.3, spindle_left
DB82, DBX9.4, spindle_right

spindle_stop
Spindle Stop
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change
0 ------> 1
Signal state 0
Corresponding to ...

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The spindle is stopped via interface signal DB3x.DBX30.0.
Please refer to Section 13.7 Spindle control.
No effect
DB82, DBX36.3, spindle_stop_req

DB82
DBX9.3
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

spindle_left
Spindle rotation counter-clockwise
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change
0 ------> 1
Signal state 0
Corresponding to ...
References

No effect
DB82, DBX36.5, spindle_left
/BAS/, ShopMill Operators Guide

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
Direction of spindle rotation (CCW) works only in conjunction with Spindle Start.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5-55

5 Signal Description
5.2

12.01

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82
DBX9.4
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

spindle_right
Spindle rotation clockwise
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change
0 ------> 1 ------> 0
Signal state 0
Corresponding to ...
References

No effect
DB82, DBX36.4, spindle_right
/BA/, ShopMill Operators Guide

DB82
DBX9.5
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal meaning
Timing diagram

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
Direction of spindle rotation (CW) works only in conjunction with spindle start.

program_extern_selected
Program is selected in the PLC
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
When the signal is set, it is possible to select an NC program externally from the PLC.

DB82, DBX9.5
Program_extern_selected
ShopMill loads the
program

DB82, DBX37.0
Program_selection_done
Corresponding to ...
References

DB82, DBX37.0, program_selection_done


/BA/, ShopMill Operators Guide

DB82
DBX9.6
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

disable_cnc_standard
Disable switchover to CNC ISO operator interface
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically
Signal(s) valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
When the signal is set, switchover from ShopMill to the CNC ISO operator interface can be
disabled.

Signal meaning

DB82
DBX9.7
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

cmm_active_in_cnc_mode
ShopMill PLC active during CNC ISO operation
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Value:
0:
ShopMill PLC not active during CNC ISO operation
1:
ShopMill PLC active during CNC ISO operation
Switchover between CNC ISO and ShopMill operation is possible at any time (even when a
program is active and running).

Application example(s)

5-56

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5 Signal Description

12.01
5.2

DB82
DBX10.0
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

program_test_request
Select Program test function
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change
0 ------> 1

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4
This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the
machine control panel. Pressing this key activates/deactivates the program test function.

DB82
DBX10.1
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

dry_run_request
Select DryRun function
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change
0 ------> 1

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4
This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the
machine control panel. Pressing this key activates/deactivates the DryRun function.

DB82
DBX10.2
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

m01_request
Select M01 function
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change
0 ------> 1

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4
This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the
machine control panel. Pressing this key activates/deactivates the M01 function.

DB82
DBX10.3
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

skip_block_request
Select Skip Block function
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change
0 ------> 1

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4
with ShopMill SW 5.1
This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the
machine control panel. Pressing this key activates/deactivates the Skip Block function.

DB82
DBX10.4
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

boot_standard
System boot on CNC ISO operator interface
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
Setting this signal forces the system to boot on the CNC ISO operator interface. If the
signal is reset again, it is possible to switch over to the ShopMill operator interface.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5-57

5 Signal Description
5.2

12.01

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82
DBX10.5
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes

nck_auto_req
Preparation of PLC block search
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change
0 ------> 1
Signal state 0
Application example(s)
Corresponding to ...

No effect
Block search via PLC
DB19, DBX6.0, signals from mode group (NCK ----> PLC) active AUTOMATIC mode

DB82
DBX10.6
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
Switchover on the NCK from JOG to AUTO can be requested with this signal.

spindle_act_m30_reset
Spindle active after M30 and reset
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Edge change
0 ------> 1
Signal state 0

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
The spindle is not switched off at program end and on reset. The spindle must be switched
off in the user PLC.
The spindle is switched off at program end and on reset by the ShopMill PLC.

DB82
DBX10.7
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

ignore_nck_alarm
Ignore NCK alarm on cycle start
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
With an active NCK alarm (DB10.DBX109.0 = 1), e.g. battery alarm, the following applies:
0: Cycle Start not possible
1: Cycle Start possible
Alarms
-- EMERGENCY STOP (DB10.DBX106.1 = 1)
-- NCK alarm with machining stop (DB21.DBX36.7 = 1)
cannot be suppressed by this interface signal, i.e. Cycle Start is not possible in these
cases.

DB82
DBX11.1
Data block
Edge evaluation: yes
Signal state 1 or edge
change 0------>1
Signal state 0 or
edge change 1---->0

get_tool_data
Update tool data
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
The tool data are updated. When this process is finished, the signal is reset again by the
ShopMill PLC.
--

DB82
DBX11.2
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

c_axis_feed_drive
Separate feed drive as C axis drive
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

This signal is not evaluated by ShopMill

5-58

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.2, 810D SW 4.2

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5 Signal Description

12.01
5.2

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82
DBX11.3
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

select_spindle_readout_0
Select spindle speed display bit 0
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

This signal is not evaluated by ShopMill

DB82
DBX11.4
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

select_spindle_readout_1
Select spindle speed display bit 1
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

This signal is not evaluated by ShopMill

DB82
DBX12
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

ext_m_cmd_1
1st extended M command for output of tool-specific M functions
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically
Signal(s) valid as of software version:
840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
ShopMill utilizes 2 extended M functions to output tool-specific M functions. The M command for the 1st extended M function is entered in this interface signal. The GUD7 variable/
display machine data 9684 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_1 must be set to this value
at the same time. The default setting is 90.
--

Signal state 1 or edge


change 0------>1

Signal state 0 or
edge change 1---->0
Corresponding to ...

DB82
DBX13
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal state 1 or edge
change 0------>1

Signal state 0 or
edge change 1---->0
Corresponding to ...

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.2, 810D SW 4.2

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.2, 810D SW 4.2

DB19, DBB13, ext_m_cmd_2,


GUD7 variable, display machine data

ext_m_cmd_2
2nd extended M command for output of tool-specific M functions
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically
Signal(s) valid as of software version:
840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
ShopMill utilizes 2 extended M functions to output tool-specific M functions. The M command for the 2nd extended M function is entered in this interface signal. The GUD7 variable/display machine data 9684 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_2 must be set to this
value at the same time. The default setting is 91.
-DB19, DBB13, ext_m_cmd_1,
GUD7 variable, display machine data

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5-59

5 Signal Description
5.2

5.2.2

12.01

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

Signals from ShopMill (output signals)

DB82
DBX30.0
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal meaning

DB82
DBX30.1
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal meaning

DB82
DBX32.0
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

base_sig.main_mode_mill.manual
Base signals - ShopMill Manual mode
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The base signal indicates that the Machine manual operating area is activated. The signal
DB82.DBX36.1 cmm_mmc_activ must also be gated.

base_sig.main_mode_mill.automatic
Base signals - ShopMill Automatic mode
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The base signal indicates that the Machine auto operating area is activated. The signal
DB82.DBX36.1 cmm_mmc_activ must also be gated.

base_sig.reset
Reset activated
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The signal indicates that a channel-specific reset was performed.

DB82
DBX32.1
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

base_sig.nc_cycle_active
Cycle active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

The signal acknowledges that a program is active.

DB82
DBX32.2
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

base_sig.nc_cycle_stopped
Cycle interrupted
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The signal acknowledges that a program has been interrupted.

DB82
DBX34.0
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

sub_mode_mill.tool
Tool operating area selected
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

5-60

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The signal indicates that the Tool operating area is activated.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5 Signal Description

12.01
5.2

DB82
DBX34.1
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

sub_mode_mill.directory
Directory operating area selected
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The signal indicates that the Directory operating area is selected.

DB82
DBX34.2
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

sub_mode_mill.messages
Alarms/messages operating area selected
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The signal indicates that the Alarms/messages operating area is selected.

DB82
DBX34.3
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

sub_mode_mill.program
Program operating area selected
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The signal indicates that the Program operating area is selected.

DB82
DBX34.4
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

sub_mode_mill.oem1
OEM1 operating area selected
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
This signal returns the OEM1 operating area selected status.

DB82
DBX34.5
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

sub_mode_mill.oem2
OEM2 operating area selected
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
This signal returns the OEM2 operating area selected status.

DB82
DBX34.6
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

sub_mode_mill.customer
CUSTOMER operating area selected
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
The signal returns the CUSTOMER operating area selected status.

DB82
DBX34.7
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

sub_mode_mill.mda
MDA operating area selected
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
This signal returns the MDA operating area selected status.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5-61

5 Signal Description
5.2

12.01

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82
DBX36.0
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

cmm_plc_active
ShopMill PLC active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal state 1 or edge


change 0------>1
Signal state 0 or edge
change 1------>0
Special cases, errors, ......

The ShopMill PLC program is activated.

DB82
DBX36.1
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

cmm_mmc_active
ShopMill user interface active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal state 1 or edge


change 0------>1
Signal state 0 or edge
change 1------>0
Special cases, errors, ......

The ShopMill user interface is activated.

DB82
DBX36.2
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

spindle_start_req
Spindle - Start requested
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

DB82
DBX36.3
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3

The ShopMill PLC program is not active. The user program can execute a CNC ISO
operation.
The ShopMill PLC program is activated when the ShopMill application is loaded in the
operator interface by pressing the ShopMill softkey or when the DB82 DBX9.7 signal
cmm_active_in_cnc_mode is set to 1.
After switchover to CNC ISO operation, the ShopMill PLC program cannot be set to an
inactive state unless the DB82 DBX9.7 signal cmm_active_in_cnc_mode is set to 0;
otherwise, the ShopMill PLC program remains active.

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3

The ShopMill user interface is not active.


The ShopMill user interface is activated when the ShopMill application is loaded to the CNC
ISO user interface via the softkey ShopMill.

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The signal indicates that a spindle start has been requested and M3 or M4 has been
executed.

spindle_stop_req
Spindle - Stop requested
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The signal indicates that a spindle Stop was requested.

DB82
DBX36.4
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

spindle_right
Spindle rotation clockwise
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

5-62

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This signal indicates that the plus travel command is applied at the spindle
(DB3x.DBX64.7).

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5 Signal Description

12.01
5.2

DB82
DBX36.5
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal meaning

DB82
DBX36.7
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal meaning

DB82
DBX37.0
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

spindle_left
Spindle rotation counter-clockwise
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This signal indicates that the minus travel command is applied at the spindle
(DB3x.DBX64.6).

ext_prog_sel
External program selected for execution
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 6.1, 810D SW 4.1
An external program has been selected for execution. External refers to all programs
which are not stored in the NC main memory, including programs on the local hard disk, in
the network drive or on other external data storage media.

Signal meaning
Corresponding to ...

program_selection_done
HMI acknowledgement that a program has been selected
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically
Signal(s) valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The signal indicates that a program has been preselected via the PLC (FB 4 select).
DB82, DBX9.5, program_extern_selected

DB82
DBX37.1
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

program_test_active
Program test function is active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4
The signal indicates that the program test function is active.

DB82
DBX37.2
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

dry_run_active
DryRun function is active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4
The signal indicates that the DryRun function is active.

DB82
DBX37.3
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

m01_active
M01 function is active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

The signal indicates that the M01 function is active.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4

5-63

5 Signal Description
5.2

12.01

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82
DBX37.4
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

skip_block_activ
Skip Block function is active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4
with ShopMill SW 5.1
The signal indicates that the skip block function is active.

DB82
DBX37.7
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

start_up_activ
ShopMill runup active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

DB82
DBX42.0
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 5.2, 810D SW 3.2
with ShopMill SW 5.2
This signal indicates that the ShopMill operator interface has been selected by means of
softkey ShopMill. It is reset if the ShopMill operator interface is deselected again (selection of CNC-ISO).

tool_m_function.function_1_on
Tool-specific M function 1 active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The signal indicates that customized machine functions are active.

DB82
DBX42.1
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

tool_m_function.function_2_on
Tool-specific M function 2 active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The signal indicates that customized machine functions are active.

DB82
DBX42.2
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

tool_m_function.function_3_on
Tool-specific M function 3 active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The signal indicates that customized machine functions are active.

DB82
DBX42.3
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

tool_m_function.function_4_on
Tool-specific M function 4 active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

5-64

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
The signal indicates that customized machine functions are active.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5 Signal Description

12.01
5.2

DB82
DBX42.4
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal meaning

DB82
DBX42.5
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal meaning

DB82
DBX42.6
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal meaning

DB82
DBX42.7
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal meaning

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

tool_m_function.function_1_activ
Tool-spec. M function 1 active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This signal provides the checkback that customized machine function 1 has been activated
or deactivated. The signal is low active.

tool_m_function.function_2_activ
Tool-spec. M function 2 active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This signal provides the checkback that customized machine function 1 has been activated
or deactivated. The signal is low active.

tool_m_function.function_3_activ
Tool-spec. M function 3 active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This signal provides the checkback that customized machine function 1 has been activated
or deactivated. The signal is low active.

tool_m_function.function_4_activ
Tool-spec. M function 4 active
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This signal provides the checkback that customized machine function 1 has been activated
or deactivated. The signal is low active.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5-65

5 Signal Description
5.2

DB82
DBW44
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

Signal meaning

5-66

12.01

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

mask_number
Current screen number of ShopMill
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4
with ShopMill SW 5.1
The signal outputs the display number of the current ShopMill screen in the MANUAL area.
The following display numbers can be output:
No. ShopMill screen
1
Settings
2
T,S,M...
3
Face milling -- accept with OK
4
Positioning
5
Zero point workpiece -- edge x
6
Zero point workpiece -- edge y
7
Zero point workpiece -- edge z
8
Zero point workpiece -- corner
9
Zero point workpiece -- hole
10 Zero point workpiece -- spigot
11 Zero point workpiece -- Calibrate probe -- length
12 Zero point workpiece -- Calibrate probe -- diameter
13 Measure tool -- length auto
14 Measure tool -- diameter auto
15 Measure tool -- adjust probe
16 Measure tool -- length manual
17 Measure tool -- diameter manual
18 Face milling
19 Basic display (empty)
20 MDA
21 Set basic WO

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

5 Signal Description

12.01
5.2

5.2.3

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

Description of diagnostics buffer signals

DB82
DBX60.0
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

nck_signal_monitor.monitor_on
Activate diagnostics function (input signal)
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

The diagnostics function is updated

DB82
DBX60.1
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

nck_signal_monitor.monitor_initialize
Initialize diagnostics function (input signal)
Signal(s) to ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

The ring buffer for the diagnostics function is cleared.

DB82
DBW n+0
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal meaning

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[m].current_number
Consecutive No. of error message m (output signal)
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically
Signal(s) valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
Consecutive No. of error message m

DB82
DBB n+2
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[m].db_number
DB number of error message m (output signal)
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

DB number of error message m

DB82
DBB n+3
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal meaning

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[m].byte_number
Byte number of error message m (output signal)
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically
Signal(s) valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
Byte number of error message m

DB82
DBB n+4
Data block
Edge evaluation: no

nck_signal_monitor.access_error[m].bit_number
Bit number of error message m (output signal)
Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal meaning

Bit number of error message m

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3

Signal(s) valid as of software version:


840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3

5-67

5 Signal Description
5.2

Note

12.01

Description of ShopMill interface DB82

Start address of ring buffer entries:


1st entry: n= 62
2nd entry: n= 68
3rd entry: n= 74
.
.
.
19th entry: n= 170
20th entry: n= 176
Number of error message:
m= 1...20

5-68

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Machine Data
6.1

NC machine data for ShopMill

Machine data
block ShopMill

There is a machine data block cmm.8x0 for ShopMill. This set of machine data
is part of the toolbox and comprises:

S NC machine data with exact value assignment


S NC machine data with a minimum value assignment
S NC machine data with variable value assignment
S Setting data
NC machine data
with exact value
assignment (G)

NC machine data with exact value assignment are machine data, which must
not be modified.

NC machine data
with minimum
value assignment
(M)

NC machine data with minimum value assignment are machine data, for which
the default value can be set higher.

NC machine data
with variable value
assignment (V)

NC machine data with variable value assignment are machine data for which
the default value can be set to a higher or lower value.

Note

S The machine data for calibrating the probe (measuring cycles) can be found
in Section 10.5 Machine data for execution of measuring cycles.

S When you are using a SINUMERIK 840D with NCU 573.2, MD 10050
$MN_SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME must be set to 0.0025.

S Set the interpolation clock cycle via MD 10050 $MN_SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME and MD 10070 $MN_IPO_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO in such a
way that a workpiece can be machined and the Simultaneous Recording
function is executable.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

6-69

6 Machine Data
6.1

12.01

NC machine data for ShopMill

Overview
Table 6-1
NC MD
number

6-70

NC machine data for ShopMill


Name

Value

Modifiable

10260

$MN_CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM

10350

$MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS

10360

$MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS

10702

$MN_IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK

H10

10715

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[0]

10716

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[0]

L6

11220

$MN_INI_FILE_MODE

11410

$MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK

H7

11450

$MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE

H7

18080

$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

HB

18082

$MN_MM_NUM_TOOL

40

18084

$MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE

18086

$MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION

35

18088

$MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

18100

$MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA

80

18118

$MN_MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES

18120

$MN_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK

20

18130

$MN_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN

170

18150

$MN_MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM

35

18160

$MN_MM_NUM_USER_MACROS

30

18170

$MN_MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES

140

18180

$MN_MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM

1200

18230

$MM_USER_MEM_BUFFERED

915

18280

$MN_MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR

400

18320

$MN_MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM

400

20108

$MC_PROG_EVENT_MASK

H09

20110

$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK

H4041

20112

$MC_START_MODE_MASK

H400

20120

$MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE

20128

$MC_COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE

20130

$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE

20150

$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[15]

20150

$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[41]

20152

$MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[5]

20152

$MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[7]

20202

$MC_WAB_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLOCKS

10

20240

$MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_BLOCKS

20250

$MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLOCKS

20310

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

H400B

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6 Machine Data

12.01
6.1

Table 6-1
NC MD
number

NC machine data for ShopMill


Name

Value

Modifiable

20320

$MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK

20734

$MC_EXTERN_FUNCTION_MASK

H8

21100

$MC_ORIENTATION_IS_EULER

21110

$MC_X_AXIS_IN_OLD_X_Z_PLANE

22550

$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE

22560

$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE

206

24002

$MC_CHBFRAME_RESET_MASK

HFFFE

27860

$MC_PROCESSTIMER_MODE

H02

28000

$MC_MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM

75

28010

$MC_MM_NUM_REORG_LUD_MODULES

10

28020

$MC_MM_NUM_LUD_NAMES_TOTAL

600

28081

$MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES

28082

$MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK

H3D

35040

$MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET
Note:
This MD is not contained in machine data record
cmm.8x0, since it is axis-dependent.

Table 6-2
Setting data
number

Description of NC
machine data

NC machine data for ShopMill

Setting data for ShopMill


Name

Value

Modifiable

42440

$SC_FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG

42442

$SC_TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG

42480

$SC_STOP_CUTCOM_STOPRE

42980

$SC_TOFRAME_MODE

References:

/LIS/, Lists
/IAC/, 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide
/IAD/, 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide
/FB/, Description of Functions

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6-71

6 Machine Data
6.2

12.01

Display machine data for ShopMill

6.2

Display machine data for ShopMill

6.2.1

Overview of machine data display

Table 6-3

Display machine data for ShopMill

MD
No.
9478

MD identifier

Comment

$MM_TO_OPTION_MASK

Settings for ShopMill

Preset
default
1

9600

$MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X

Simulation of default value X

9601

$MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y

Simulation of default value Y

9602

$MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA

Simulation of default display area

100

9603

$MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X

Simulation of maximum display X

9604

$MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y

Simulation of maximum display Y

9605

$MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA

Simulation of maximum display area

1000

9626
9650

$MM_CTM_TRACE
$MM_CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM

Settings in ShopMill
Position of coordinate system

1
0

9651

$MM_CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT

Tool management concepts

9652

$MM_CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL

Tool monitoring

9653

$MM_CMM_ENABLE_A_AXIS

Enabling 4th axis for user interface

9654

$MM_CMM_SPEED_FIELD_DISPLAY_RES

Number of decimal places in the speed input


field

9655

$MM_CMM_CYC_PECKING_DIST

Lifting amount for deep hole drilling

1.0

9656

$MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_DIST

Lifting amount for boring

0.1

9657

$MM_CMM_CYC_MIN_CONT_PO_TO_RAD

Indication of variation of the smallest possible


cutter radius in %

9658

$MM_CMM_CYC_MAX_CONT_PO_TO_RAD

Indication of variation of the largest possible


cutter radius

0.01

9659

$MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_ANGLE

Tool orientation angle on retraction

0.0

9660
9661

$MM_CMM_ENABLE_PLANE_CHANGE
$MM_CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES

Changing to machining plane (G17, G18, G19)


Number of input fields for customized M commands

1
0

9662

$MM_CMM_COUNT_GEAR_STEPS

Number of gear steps

9663

$MM_CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM

Display radius/diameter for tool

9664

$MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_MIN

Max. feed in mm/min

10000.0

9665

$MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_ROT

Max. feed in mm/rev

1.0

9666

$MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_TOOTH

Max. feed in mm/tooth

1.0

9667

$MM_CMM_FOLLOW_ON_TOOL_ACTIVE

Tool preselection active

9668

$MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I_AND_II

M code coolants I and II (--1 = no M code)

--1

9669

$MM_CMM_FACE_MILL_EFF_TOOL_DIAM

Effective mill diameter for face milling

85.0

9670

$MM_CMM_START_RAD_CONTOUR_POCKE

--1.0

9672

$MM_CMM_FIXED_TOOL_PLACE

Radius of approach circle for finishing cut on


contour pockets plus half the final machining
allowance (--1 = safety clearance)
Fixed location coding

9673

$MM_CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION

Number of loading station

9674

$MM_CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE

Display of magazine list

9675

$MM_CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE

Customer power-up display

9676

$MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1

Path for drive names in directory management

C:\NC_Files

9677

$MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2

Path for drive names in directory management

--

9678

$MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3

Path for drive names in directory management

--

9679

$MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4

Path for drive names in directory management

--

6-72

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6 Machine Data

12.01
6.2

Display machine data for ShopMill

MD
No.
9680

MD identifier

Comment

$MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I

M code for coolant I

Preset
default
8

9681

$MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_II

M code for coolant II

9682

$MM_CMM_CYC_BGF_BORE_DIST

Preboring depth for drill and thread milling

9684

$MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_1

M code for tool-specific bits 1

90

9685
9686

$MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_2
$MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_OFF

M code for tool-specific bits 2


M code for coolant OFF

91
9

9703

$MM_CMM_INDEX_AXIS_4

Axis index for 4th axis

9704

$MM_CMM_INDEX_AXIS_5

Axis index for 5th axis

9705

$MM_CMM_INDEX_SPINDLE

Axis index for spindle

9719

$MM_CMM_OPTION_MASK

Settings for ShopMill

H7001

9720

$MM_CMM_ENABLE_B_AXIS

B axis enable signal

9721

$MM_CMM_ENABLE_TRACYL

Enable signal for cylinder peripheral surface


transformation

9723

$MM_CMM_ENABLE_SWIVELING_HEAD

Enable swiveling heads

9724

$MM_CMM_CIRCLE_RAPID_FEED

Rapid traverse feed for positioning on circular


path

5000

9750

$MM_CMM_MEAS_PROBE_INPUT

Measuring input for a workpiece probe

9751
9752

$MM_CMM_MEAS_T_PROBE_INPUT
$MM_CMM_MEASURING_DISTANCE

Measuring input for tool probe


Maximum measurement path (before and after
the measuring point) for automatic measurement in the program.

1
5

9753

$MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_MAN

Maximum measurement path for manual measurement (before and after the measuring
point)

10

9754

$MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_LENGTH

Maximum measurement path for tool length


(before and after measuring point)

9755

$MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_RADIUS

Maximum measurement path for tool radius


(before and after measuring point)

9756

$MM_CMM_MEASURING_FEED

Measuring feed

300

9757

$MM_CMM_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL

Feed in the plane with collision monitoring

1000

9758

$MM_CMM_POS_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL

Infeed with collision monitoring

1000

9759

$MM_CMM_MAX_CIRC_SPEED_ROT_SP

Max. circumferential velocity for tool measurement with rotating spindle

100

9760

$MM_CMM_SPIND_SPEED_ROT_SP

Max. speed for tool measurement with rotating


spindle

1000

9761

$MM_CMM_MIN_FEED_ROT_SP

10

9762

$MM_CMM_MEAS_TOL_ROT_SP

Minimum feed for tool measurement with rotating spindle


Measuring accuracy for tool measurements
with rotating spindle

9763

$MM_CMM_TOOL_PROBE_TYPE

Type of tool probe

9764

$MM_CMM_TOOL_PROBE_ALLOWS_AXIS

Permissible axis directions for tool probe


(ZYX)

133

9765

$MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_LENGTH_MEA

Diameter of tool probe for length measurement

9766

$MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_RAD_MEAS

Diameter of tool probe for radius measurement

9767

$MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIST_RAD_MEAS

Infeed from top edge of tool probe for radius


measurement

9768

$MM_CMM_T_PROBE_APPROACH_DIR

Plane approach direction, tool at tool probe

--1

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

0.01

6-73

6 Machine Data
6.2

12.01

Display machine data for ShopMill

6.2.2

Description of display machine data

9478
$MM_TO_OPTION_MASK
MD number
Settings for ShopMill
Default setting: 1
Min. input limit: 0000
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 1
Data type: LONG
Meaning:

Max. input limit: FFFF


Unit: Hex
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 6.2, 810D SW 4.2
Bit0: Input extensions for ShopMill (cooling water, etc.)
Bit1: Reserved
Bit2: Reserved
Bit3: Creation of new tools directly in a magazine location not allowed
Bit4: Reserved
Bit5: Reserved
Bit6: Reserved
Bit7: Input disable for loaded tools (wear data excepted)
Bit8: Evaluate file to_mill.ini
Bit9: No loading/unloading when program is running
Bit10: Compute tool wear inputs additively
Bit11: Spare

9600
$MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X
MD number
Simulation of default value X
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: --10000
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: LONG
Meaning:
Corresponding to ...

Max. input limit: 10000


Unit: mm
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the size of the X coordinate of the display area. When you press softkey
TO ORIGIN in simulation mode, you will go to the value set in this MD.
MD 9601 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y
MD 9602 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA

9601
$MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y
MD number
Simulation of default value Y
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: --10000
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: LONG
Meaning:
Corresponding to ...

6-74

Max. input limit: 10000


Unit: mm
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the size of the Y coordinate of the display area. When you press softkey
TO ORIGIN in simulation mode, you will go to the value set in this MD.
MD 9600 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X
MD 9602 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6 Machine Data

12.01
6.2

Display machine data for ShopMill

9602
$MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA
MD number
Simulation of default display area
Default setting: 100
Min. input limit: --10000
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: LONG
Meaning:
Corresponding to ...

Max. input limit: 10000


Unit: mm
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the size of the display area above the X coordinate. The Y coordinate is
calculated automatically from this setting.
MD 9600 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X
MD 9601 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y

9603
$MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X
MD number
Simulation of maximum display X
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: --10000
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: LONG
Meaning:

Corresponding to ...

Max. input limit: 10000


Unit: mm
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the size of the X coordinate of a second display area (e.g. for larger workpieces).
When you press softkey MAX in simulation mode, the value preset in this MD will apply.
MD 9604 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y
MD 9605 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA

9604
$MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y
MD number
Simulation of maximum display Y
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: --10000
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: LONG
Meaning:
Corresponding to ...

Max. input limit: 10000


Unit: mm
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the size of the Y coordinate of a second display area.
When you press softkey MAX in simulation mode, the value preset in this MD will apply.
MD 9603 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X
MD 9605 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA

9605
$MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA
MD number
Simulation of maximum display area
Default setting: 1000
Min. input limit: --10000
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: LONG
Meaning:
Corresponding to ...

Max. input limit: 10000


Unit: mm
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This machine data defines the second display area above the X coordinate. The Y coordinate is calculated automatically from this setting.
MD 9603 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X
MD 9604 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6-75

6 Machine Data
6.2

12.01

Display machine data for ShopMill

9626
$MM_CTM_TRACE
MD number
Settings in ShopMill
Default setting: 1
Min. input limit: 0000
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: WORD
Meaning:

Max. input limit: FFFF


Unit: Hex
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 6.2, 810D SW 4.2

Bit 0: Display of /xy version


Bits 1 to 13: Reserved
Bit 14: Calculation of ZO data in current ZO if bit 14== 0

9650
$MM_CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM
MD number
Position of coordinate system
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: 0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: BYTE

Max. input limit: 47


Unit: -Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
You can use this MD to match the coordinate system of the operator interface to that of the
machine.
The coordinate system can assume the following positions:

Meaning:

+Z

+Y

+Z

+X

+Y

+Y

+X
+X
+X

+Z

+Z
+Y

+Z

+Y

+X

+Z
3

+Y

+X

+X

+X
+Z

+Z

+X
+Z

+X

+Y
+Z

+Y
+Y

+Y

+X

10

+X
+Z

+X

11

+Z
+X

+Z

+Y

+Y
+Y

+Y
12

+X

13

14

+X

+Z

+Z
+X

+Z
+Z

16

+Z

17

18

+Y

+X

+Z

+X

+Z

+Y

19

+X
+Y

+Y

+X

15

+Z
+Y

+X

+Y

+Z

+Y

+Y

+Z
+Z
20

6-76

+X
21

+Y

22

+X

23

+Y

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6 Machine Data

12.01
6.2

9650
MD number

Display machine data for ShopMill

$MM_CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM
Position of coordinate system

+Y

+Y

+Z

+X

+Z

+Z

+X
+X

24

25

26

+Y

+Z

+Y

27
+X

+Z

+X

+X

+X
28

29

30

+Y
+Y

+X
+Y

32

+Z
+Z

+X
+Y

+Z

33 +X

34

+Y

+Y

+Z

+Y

+Z

+X

35
+X

+X

+Y

31

+Z

+Z

+Z

+Z

+Z
+X

37

36
+Z

38

+Y

40

+X

+Z

41

+X
+Y

+Y

+Z
+X

+Y
39

+Y
+Z

+X
+X

44

+Z
+Y

+Y

+Y

+X

42

+X

+Y
+Z

+X

+Z

43
+Y

+Y
+Y

+X
+Z
+Z
47
45
46
+X
Note:
In the ShopMill user interface all help screens, sequence graphs, simulation and input fields
with circle direction indication change automatically according to the selected position.

9651
$MM_CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT
MD number
Tool management concepts
Default setting: 2
Min. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: BYTE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 4


Unit: -Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
Selection of one of two tool management variants (see Section 9 Tool Management):
2: Tool management with loading/unloading
4: Tool management without loading/unloading

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6-77

6 Machine Data
6.2

12.01

Display machine data for ShopMill

9652
$MM_CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL
MD number
Tool monitoring
Default setting: 1
Min. input limit: 0
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: BYTE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 1


Unit: -Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD activates the tool monitoring. The tool monitoring function monitors the tool life and
tool loading operations:

0 = Tool monitoring is not displayed


1 = Tool monitoring is displayed

9653
$MM_CMM_ENABLE_A_AXIS
MD number
Enabling 4th axis for user interface
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: 0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: BYTE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 3


Unit: -Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3

Enable 4th axis (e.g. A axis) for user interface:


0 = 4th axis is not displayed on the user interface
1 = 4th axis is displayed on the user interface
2 = 4th axis is displayed on the user interface and can be programmed
3 = 4th axis is displayed on the user interface only for reference point approach

9654
$MM_CMM_SPEED_FIELD_DISPLAY_RES
MD number
Number of decimal places in the speed input field
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: 0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: BYTE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 4


Unit: -Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD is for defining the number of decimal places in parameter field S (speed).

9655
$MM_CMM_CYC_PECKING_DIST
MD number
Lifting amount for deep hole drilling
Default setting: 1.0
Min. input limit: 0.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 100.0


Unit: mm
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the retraction distance for deep hole drilling with chip break.

9656
$MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_DIST
MD number
Lifting amount for boring
Default setting: 0.1
Min. input limit: --1
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

6-78

Max. input limit: 10.0


Unit: mm
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the clearance distance traveled by the tool in the X direction during hole
boring operations.
Note:
--1 means that the value of the retraction distance D can be entered in the operator
interface.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6 Machine Data

12.01
6.2

Display machine data for ShopMill

9657
$MM_CMM_CYC_MIN_CONT_PO_TO_RAD
MD number
Indication of variation of the smallest possible cutter radius in %
Default setting: 5
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 50
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: %
Data type: WORD
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
Meaning:
This MD is required for contour pocket milling. This parameter is for defining by which percentage the radius of a cutter used may be smaller than the one which was used for generating.

9658
$MM_CMM_CYC_MAX_CONT_PO_TO_RAD
MD number
Indication of variation of the greatest possible cutter radius
Default setting: 0.01
Min. input limit: 0.0
Max. input limit: 10.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
Meaning:
This MD is required for contour pocket milling. This parameter is for defining by which
amount the radius of a cutter used may be greater than the one which was used for generating.

9659
$MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_ANGLE
MD number
Tool orientation angle on retraction
Default setting: 0.0
Min. input limit: --1
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 360


Unit: degrees
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the spindle position (0...360_) at which the tool comes to a standstill, e.g.
drill toolholder in a hole.
Note:
--1 means that the value for the tool orientation angle can be input in the operator interface.

9660
$MM_CMM_ENABLE_PLANE_CHANGE
MD number
Changing to machining plane (G17, G18, G19)
Default setting: 1
Min. input limit: 0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: BYTE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 1


Unit: -Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3

Enable change to machining plane (G17, G18, G19):


0 = Change to machining plane (G17, G18, G19) not possible
1 = Change to machining plane (G17, G18, G19) possible

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6-79

6 Machine Data
6.2

12.01

Display machine data for ShopMill

9661
$MM_CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES
MD number
Number of input fields for customized M commands
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 4
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: BYTE
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
Meaning:
This MD activates the number of input fields for customized M commands:
0 = No display fields for customized M commands
1 = 1 field for one customized M command is displayed
2 = 2 fields for 2 customized M commands are displayed
3 = 3 fields for 3 customized M commands are displayed
4 = 4 fields for 4 customized M commands are displayed

9662
$MM_CMM_COUNT_GEAR_STEPS
MD number
Number of gear steps
Default setting: 1
Min. input limit: 0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: BYTE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 5


Unit: -Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD is for setting the number of gear steps (0 to 5) for the spindle. The possibility of
input in the user interface is thus restricted.

9663
$MM_CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM
MD number
Display radius/diameter for tool
Default setting: 1
Min. input limit: 0
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: BYTE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 1


Unit: -Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines how the tool is displayed or is to be input:
0 = Radius
1 = Diameter

9664
$MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_MIN
MD number
Max. feed in mm/min
Default setting: 10000.0
Min. input limit: 0.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 100000.0


Unit: mm/min
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD is for entering the upper feedrate input limit for mm/min.

9665
$MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_ROT
MD number
Max. feed in mm/rev
Default setting: 1.0
Min. input limit: 0.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

6-80

Max. input limit: 10.0


Unit: mm/rev
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD is for entering the upper feedrate input limit for mm/rev.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6 Machine Data

12.01
6.2

Display machine data for ShopMill

9666
$MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_TOOTH
MD number
Max. feed in mm/tooth
Default setting: 1.0
Min. input limit: 0.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 5.0


Unit: mm/tooth
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD is for entering the upper feedrate input limit for mm/tooth.

9667
$MM_CMM_FOLLOW_ON_TOOL_ACTIVE
MD number
Tool preselection active
Default setting: 1
Min. input limit: 0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: BYTE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 1


Unit: -Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines whether a tool preselection is active in a magazine (e.g. chain magazine),
i.e. the following tool is already brought to the load station for a pending tool change.
0 = Tool preselection is not active
1 = Tool preselection is active

9668
$MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I_AND_II
MD number
M code coolants I and II (--1 = no M code)
Default setting: --1
Min. input limit: --1
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: WORD
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 32767


Unit: -Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4
This machine data enables you to specify the M code if both coolants I and II are activated
simultaneously in the tool list.
Value:
--1
= No M code
xy
= Mxy for coolant I and II on (xy = value of MD 9668)

9669
$MM_CMM_FACE_MILL_EFF_TOOL_DIAM
MD number
Effective mill diameter for face milling
Default setting: 85.0
Min. input limit: 50.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 100.0


Unit: %
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4
This MD specifies the effective mill diameter for face milling. The ratio d/D > MD 9669
(where d = cut diameter, D = largest mill diameter) defines how far the mill goes beyond the
workpiece during face milling.

9670
MD number

$MM_CMM_START_RAD_CONTOUR_POCKE
Radius of approach circle for finishing cut on contour pockets plus half the final machining
allowance (--1 = safety clearance)
Default setting: --1
Min. input limit: -1
Max. input limit: 100.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4
Meaning:
This MD affects the radius of the approach circle when finishing contour pockets.
--1 = The radius is selected such that the safety clearance for final machining is observed at
the start point.
>0 = The radius is selected such that the value of this MD for final machining allowance is
observed at the start point.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6-81

6 Machine Data
6.2

12.01

Display machine data for ShopMill

9672
$MM_CMM_FIXED_TOOL_PLACE
MD number
Fixed location coding
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: 0
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: BYTE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 1


Unit: -Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4

This MD defines the state of the tools:


0 = Tools with flexible locations in the magazine
1 = Tools with fixed locations in the magazine

9673
$MM_CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION
MD number
Number of loading station
Default setting: 1
Min. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: BYTE
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 2


Unit: -Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4
This MD enables you to specify the loading station used to load and unload the magazine.
1 = Loading station 1
2 = Loading station 2

9674
$MM_CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE
MD number
Display of magazine list
Default setting: 1
Min. input limit: 0
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: BYTE
Meaning:

0 = Magazine list is not displayed


1 = Magazine list is displayed

9675
$MM_CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE
MD number
Customer power-up display
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: 0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Data type: BYTE

Meaning:

Max. input limit: 1


Unit: -Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4

Max. input limit: 1


Unit: -Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4
with ShopMill SW 5.1

Customer power-up display is activated if


0 = Siemens-configured customer power-up display
1 = Customer-configured customer power-up display

9676
$MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1
MD number
Path for drive names in directory management
Default setting: C:\NC_Files
Min. input limit: -Max. input limit: -Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: STRING (80 characters)
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4 with ShopMill SW 5.1
Meaning:
This MD defines the path for the drive name of the 2nd softkey (horizontal softkey menu) in
the directory management with hard disk network link. The softkey is not displayed if a
blank string is entered in the display machine data.

6-82

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6 Machine Data

12.01
6.2

Display machine data for ShopMill

9677
$MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2
MD number
Path for drive names in directory management
Default setting: -Min. input limit: -Max. input limit: -Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: STRING (80 characters)
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4 with ShopMill SW 5.1
Meaning:
This MD defines the path for the drive name of the 3rd softkey (horizontal softkey menu) in
the directory management with hard disk network link. The softkey is not displayed if a
blank string is entered in the display machine data.

9678
$MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3
MD number
Path for drive names in directory management
Default setting: -Min. input limit: -Max. input limit: -Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: STRING (80 characters)
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4 with ShopMill SW 5.1
Meaning:
This MD defines the path for the drive name of the 4th softkey (horizontal softkey menu) in
the directory management with hard disk network link. The softkey is not displayed if a
blank string is entered in the display machine data.

9679
$MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4
MD number
Path for drive names in directory management
Default setting: -Min. input limit: -Max. input limit: -Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: STRING (80 characters)
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4 with ShopMill SW 5.1
Meaning:
This MD defines the path for the drive name of the 5th softkey (horizontal softkey menu) in
the directory management with hard disk network link. The softkey is not displayed if a
blank string is entered in the display machine data.

9680
$MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I
MD number
M code for coolant I
Default setting: 8
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 32767
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: WORD
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4 with ShopMill SW 5.1
Meaning:
This MD is set to define the M code for coolant I. This code is output when the tool is
changed.

9681
$MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_II
MD number
M code for coolant II
Default setting: 7
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 32767
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: WORD
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4 with ShopMill SW 5.1
Meaning:
This MD is set to define the M code for coolant II. This code is output when the tool is
changed.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6-83

6 Machine Data
6.2

12.01

Display machine data for ShopMill

9682
$MM_CMM_CYC_BGF_BORE_DIST
MD number
Preboring depth for drill and thread milling
Default setting: 1
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 100
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 6.3, 810D SW 4.3 with ShopMill SW 6.2
Meaning:
This MD defines the preboring depth for drill and thread milling.

9684
$MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_1
MD number
M code for tool-specific bits 1
Default setting: 90
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 32767
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: LONG
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 6.3, 810D SW 4.3 with ShopMill SW 6.2
Meaning:
This MD defines the M code for tool-specific bits 1.
Please note that the same setting must be made in interface signal DB82.DBB12
ext_m_cmd_1 (see also Chapter 7 Reservations).

9685
$MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_2
MD number
M code for tool-specific bits 2
Default setting: 91
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 32767
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: LONG
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 6.3, 810D SW 4.3with ShopMill SW 6.2
Meaning:
This MD defines the M code for tool-specific bits 2.
Please note that the same setting must be made in interface signal DB82.DBB13
ext_m_cmd_2 (see also Chapter 7 Reservations).

9686
$MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_OFF
MD number
M code for coolant OFF
Default setting: 9
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 32767
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: LONG
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 6.3, 810D SW 4.3 with ShopMill SW 6.2
Meaning:
This MD defines the M code for switching off the coolant. This code is output when the tool
is changed.

9703
$MM_CMM_INDEX_AXIS_4
MD number
Axis index for 4th axis
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 127
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: UBYTE
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 5.3, 810D SW 3.3
Meaning:
The number of the channel axis is entered in this MD.

9704
$MM_CMM_INDEX_AXIS_5
MD number
Axis index for 5th axis
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 127
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: UBYTE
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 5.3, 810D SW 3.3
Meaning:
The number of the channel axis is entered in this MD.

6-84

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6 Machine Data

12.01
6.2

Display machine data for ShopMill

9705
$MM_CMM_INDEX_SPINDLE
MD number
Axis index for spindle
Default setting: 4
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 127
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: UBYTE
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 5.3, 810D SW 3.3
Meaning:
The number of the channel axis is entered in this MD.

9719
$MM_CMM_OPTION_MASK
MD number
Settings for ShopMill
Default setting: H7001
Min. input limit: 0000
Max. input limit: FFFF
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 1
Unit: Hex
Data type: LONG
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 6.2, 810D SW 4.2
Meaning:
Bit0: Display ShopMill softkey when creating new programs.
Bit1: Spare
Bit2: MDI buffer is not deleted automatically.
Bit3: Spare
Bit4: Spare
Bit5: Spare
Bit6: Spare
Bit7: Spare
Bit8: Direct switchover to PCU 50 by means of extended operating area changeover
(SM Open)
Bit9: Program start in all screens
Bit10: Reserved
Bit11: Spare
Bit12: Spare
Bit13: Spare
Bit14: Reserved
Bit15: Reserved
Bit16: Reserved
Bit17: Reserved
Bit18: On switchover from JOG/MDI/Auto, change the operating mode, but do not branch
to Machine
Bit19: The text Machine and Workpiece is used instead of MCS and WCS
Bit20: Display WO as WO1 or G54
Bit21: Enable basic block display

9720
$MM_CMM_ENABLE_B_AXIS
MD number
B axis enable signal
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 3
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: BYTE
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4 with ShopMill SW 5.1
Meaning:
Enable 5th axis (e.g. B axis) for user interface:
0 = 5th axis is not displayed on the user interface
1 = 5th axis is displayed on the user interface
2 = 5th axis is displayed on the user interface and can be programmed
3 = 5th axis is displayed on the user interface only for reference point approach

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

6-85

6 Machine Data
6.2

12.01

Display machine data for ShopMill

9721
$MM_CMM_ENABLE_TRACYL
MD number
Enable signal for cylinder peripheral surface transformation
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: BYTE
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4 with ShopMill SW 5.1
Meaning:
Activate the cylinder peripheral surface transformation function via the operator interface:
0 = The cylinder peripheral surface transformation function is not displayed on the operator
interface.
1 = The cylinder peripheral surface transformation function is displayed on the operator
interface.
The cylinder peripheral surface transformation function can be used only if it has been started up as a standard function.
References: /FB2/, M1, Kinematic Transformations

9723
$MM_CMM_ENABLE_SWIVELLING_HEAD
MD number
Enable swivelling heads
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Data type: BYTE
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.4, 810D SW 2.4 with ShopMill SW 5.1
Meaning:
This MD can be set to select whether or not swivel heads can be used on the machine.
0 = No screenforms supporting swivel heads are made available.
1 = Screenforms supporting swivel heads are made available.

9724
$MM_CMM_CIRCLE_RAPID_FEED
MD number
Rapid traverse feed for positioning on circular path
Default setting: 5000
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 100000
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm/min
Data type: DOUBLE
Valid as of software version:
840D SW 6.3, 810D SW 4.3 with ShopMill SW 6.2
Meaning:
Use this MD to set the rapid traverse feed in mm/min for positioning on a circular path.

Note
For a description of the display machine data for measuring cycles, please
refer to Section 10.5 Machine data for execution of measuring cycles.

6-86

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Reserved Functions

The following functions are utilized by ShopMill and must not be assigned for
other purposes.

M functions

M functions with extended address:


M[value]=90
M[value]=91
M90 and M91 are defaults and must be changed where required.
1. extended M address:
DB82.DBB12 ext_m_cmd_1, default=90
Display MD 9684 CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_1, default=90
2. extended M address:
DB82.DBB13 ext_m_cmd_2, default=91
Display MD 9685 CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_2, default=91

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

7-87

7 Reserved Functions

12.01

Notes

7-88

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Tools

In ShopMill the tool change is initiated by a tool-changing cycle. This cycle is


called by the ShopMill cycles where a tool can be programmed.

Operating
sequence

The ShopMill tool change cycle performs the following tasks:

1. Deactivate compensation of the active tool


2. Select new tool
(from the programmed cycle screen)

3. Call tool change cycle L6


Note: Tool change cycle L6 is called with M6.

4. Output of tool-specific functions depending on the setting in the


relevant column of the tool table

S
S
S
S
S

Number of teeth
M3/M4/M5 from column Spindle right/left/off
M7 from the Coolant 1 on/off column
M8 from the Coolant 2 on/off column
Tool-specific M functions 1...4 from the columns
Tool-spec. fct. 1, Tool- spec. fct. 2, Tool-spec. fct. 3,
Tool-spec. fct. 4

5. Select tool edge D1 or D2


(tool edge number from programmed cycle screen)

6. Preselect next tool


(is automatically entered by the ShopMill programming)

Fig. 8-1

ShopMill tool change cycle

Note
The tool-specific functions (number of teeth, spindle, coolant, M functions) are
stored in cutting edge parameter 25 ($TC_DP25).

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

8-89

8 Tools
8.1

12.01
Tool-changing cycle adapting to the machine

8.1

General

Tool-changing cycle adapting to the machine

You need to create a tool change cycle, e.g. L6, for the machine-specific parts
of the tool change.
Example L6.SPF in the toolbox shows how to do this. This example requires:

S MD 22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1
Tool is changed via an M function.

S MD 10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[0]=6
M function (M6) used to call the tool change, i.e. the subroutine assigned via
MD 10716 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[0].

S MD 10716 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[0]=L6
Name of the subroutine (L6) to be executed after the M function defined in
MD 10715.
If the subroutine name is to be entered by means of program or MDI, the
name must be enclosed in quotation marks. This does not apply to manual
inputs.

S MD 22560 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE=206
M function (M206) with which the tool change is defined for the tool management.
The machine data specified above can be found in the tool box in machine data
set CMM.8X0.

Example

8-90

PROC L6 SAVE
.
.;______________________________________________________
;Example tool change cycle for machine manufacturer
;_______________________________________________________
DEF INT _WZ_IN_SP,_WZ_VOR
;
STOPRE
; Preprocessing stop
;
IF (NOT $P_SEARCH)
; if no block search
_WZ_IN_SP=$TC_MPP6[9998,1]
; Tool in spindle
GETSELT(_WZ_VOR)
; Preselected tool
;
IF (_WZ_IN_SP<>_WZ_VOR)
; if another tool
; Position spindle:
SPOS=...
; Approach tool change position:
SUPA D0 G0 G90 G40 G60 Z=...
ENDIF
ENDIF
;
;Change tool: Tool management and PLC
M206
STOPRE
; Preprocessing stop
M17

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

8 Tools

12.01
8.1

Tool-changing cycle adapting to the machine

Note
Values must be entered after SPOS= and Z= in the sample tool change
cycle L6 above.

Explanation of
example

Tool change cycle L6 contains the following steps:


1. Spindle positioning
2. Approaching tool change positions in the machine coordinate system
3. Execute tool change (M206)
The tool must be at a safe height after tool change so that all motions in the
plane are permissible!

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

8-91

8 Tools
8.2

8.2

12.01
Manual tools

Manual tools

Manual tools are tools which are required during machining, but are only available in the tool list but not in the tool-holding magazine. These tools must be attached/detached manually to/from the spindle.
Machine data 22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit1=1,
can be set to allow tools without a magazine location assignment to be selected
for tool changes.
An alarm is output every time the manual tool is loaded, unloaded or replaced.
(E.g. Channel 1, manual tool mill20, duplo no. 1 load to toolholder 1. i.e. the
manual tool mill20 must be attached to the spindle.)
Manual tools are identified by magazine location 1 in magazine 9999 in the interface to the PLC. Bit5 in DB72 DBB (n+0) is set to load the tool and bit6 to
unload it.

8-92

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

8 Tools

12.01
8.3

8.3

Switching on spindle and coolant

Switching on spindle and coolant


The functions spindle direction (right/left/off) and coolant can be assigned to a
tool.

Cursor texts: Spindle ri/le/off

Fig. 8-2

Coolant 1/2
on/off

Tool list: Coolant and spindle direction of rotation

Make the assignment between the coolant and the appropriate M commands in
the following machine data:
MD 9680 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I
MD 9681 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_II
MD 9668 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I_AND_II

Modifying the
cursor texts

The cursor texts (Spindle ri/le/off, coolant 1/2 on/off) are stored in the
CUST.TXT file and can be modified (see Section 8.5 Modifying cursor texts for
tool-specific functions).

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

8-93

8 Tools
8.4

12.01
Activate tool-specific M functions 1...4

8.4

Activate tool-specific M functions 1...4


The tool-specific M functions 1...4 are intended for further machine functions,
which can be activated for a tool. For example, third coolant, speed monitoring,
tool break, etc.
Cursor texts: Tool-spec. fct. 1...4

Fig. 8-3

Tool list: Tool-specific functions 1...4

The fields in the tool list can be grayed out with the display MD 9661,
CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES = 0.
The tool-specific M functions 1...4 are output by the ShopMill tool change cycle
after M6 for a PLC cycle in DB82.
Tool-specific M function 1 ... 4 in DB82:
DB82 DBX42.0
DB82 DBX42.1
DB82 DBX42.2
DB82 DBX42.3

CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_1_on
CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_2_on
CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_3_on
CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_4_on

DB82 DBX42.4
DB82 DBX42.5
DB82 DBX42.6
DB82 DBX42.7

CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_1_active
CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_2_active
CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_3_active
CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_4_active

Bits DB82.DBX42.4...7 indicates whether the function displayed in bits


DB82.DBX42.0...3 is valid. The signal is low active.

Example

The following functions are programmed:


Tool-specific M_function 1: On
Tool-specific M_function 2: No change
Tool-specific M_function 3: Off
Tool-specific M_function 4: No change
M command M90=161 is generated. The following bits are set in DB82.DBB42:
Table 8-1

8-94

DB82.DBB42

Bit

Status

Activate tool-specific M function 1

No change in tool-specific M function 2

Deactivate tool-specific M function 3

No change in tool-specific M function 4

Accept function from bit0

Do not accept function from bit1

Accept function from bit2

Do not accept function from bit3

Function

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

8 Tools

12.01
8.4

Activate tool-specific M functions 1...4

Special features in
MANUAL mode

In MANUAL mode, no tool-specific M functions are output to the PLC. On tool


change in the MANUAL mode, these functions can be initiated by the operator
using the keys on the machine control panel (implementation via PLC user program).

Modifying the
cursor texts

The cursor texts (Tool-specific function 1, ...) are stored in the CUST.TXT file
and can be modified (see Section 8.5 Modifying texts for tool-specific functions).

Note
Tool-specific M functions are output from the HMI to the ShopMill PLC using M
functions with extended address (see Chapter 7 Reservations).

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

8-95

8 Tools
8.5

12.01
Modify texts for tool-specific functions

8.5

Modify texts for tool-specific functions

8.5.1

PCU 20

For tool-specific functions, you can modify the parameter texts in the operation
area Program -- linear/circular, Machine functions menu and the cursor texts in
the tool list. Cursor texts are texts, shown in the message line when the cursor
is positioned on the relevant input field.
You can use the aluc.txt text file on the application diskette to modify the texts of
the tool-specific functions.

Text numbers

The texts are assigned to the following text numbers in the file aluc.txt:
Table 8-2

Text assignment

Cursor texts in the Tool list menu

Text number

Tool-specific function 1 (tool-spec. fct. 1)

89911

Tool-specific function 2 (tool-spec. fct. 2)

89912

Tool-specific function 3 (tool-spec. fct. 3)

89913

Tool-specific function 4 (tool-spec. fct. 4)

89914

Coolant 1

89921

Coolant 2

89922

Parameter texts in the


Program straight line/circle machine function menu
Tool-specific function 1 (tool-spec. fct. 1)

89915

Tool-specific function 2 (tool-spec. fct. 2)

89916

Tool-specific function 3 (tool-spec. fct. 3)

89917

Tool-specific function 4 (tool-spec. fct. 4)

89918

Coolant 1

89919

Coolant 2

89920

This means that text numbers 89911 and 89915 etc. refer to the same functions.

Note
The maximum number of character is 23 for the cursor texts and 14 for the
parameter texts.

Language
assignment

8-96

Each language directory contains a file named aluc.txt.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

8 Tools

12.01
8.5

Example

Modify texts for tool-specific functions

The cursor text Tool-spec. function 1 in the tool list should be changed to Air
cooling.
You must make the following entry in file aluc.txt:
89911 0 0 Air cooling
The two parameters 2 and 3 separated by blanks are control characters for text
output and must always be set to 0.

Procedure

To select file aluc.txt, proceed as follows:

S Switch to the subdirectory ...\instutil in the application environment.


S Call the APP_INST program.
S Select <2> Modify configuration.
S Specify whether the texts for the 1st or 2nd language are to be edited:
<4> Edit text files for first language or
<5> Edit text files for second language.

S Scroll through the menu until the option alarm texts for user cycles
appears and then enter the corresponding number.
This opens the text file ALUC.TXT with the DOS editor edit.

S Enter the texts of your choice.


S Save the file and close the editor.
S Press the ESC key twice.
The text modifications become operative when you take the following steps:

S Select <1> Install all modules on hardware.


S Confirm your language selection with F4 Accept.
S Select <2> Create Flash Memory Card image.
S Specify the source drive for the system disks.
S Specify the target path for the system disks.
S Enter the target drive to which the file must be saved.
S Specify the target path for the file.
S Use SINUCOPY to create a PC card (see Subsection 2.2.1 Start-up on a
PCU 20).

S Load the PC card contents to the control (see Subsection 2.2.1 Start-up on
a PCU 20).

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

8-97

8 Tools
8.5

8.5.2

12.01
Modify texts for tool-specific functions

PCU 50

For tool-specific functions, you can modify the parameter texts in the operation
area Program -- linear/circular, Machine functions menu and the cursor texts in
the tool list. Cursor texts are texts, shown in the message line when the cursor
is positioned on the relevant input field.
The desired texts must be entered in the text file C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_xx.com. The
file aluc_xx.com may have to be created in directory cus.dir.
Add the following line in section [TextFiles} of file C:\user\mbdde.ini:
UserZYK=C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_

Text numbers

The texts are assigned to the following text numbers in the file aluc_xx.com:
Table 8-3

Text assignment

Cursor texts in the Tool list menu

Text number

Tool-specific function 1 (tool-spec. fct. 1)

89911

Tool-specific function 2 (tool-spec. fct. 2)

89912

Tool-specific function 3 (tool-spec. fct. 3)

89913

Tool-specific function 4 (tool-spec. fct. 4)

89914

Coolant 1

89921

Coolant 2

89922

Parameter texts in the


Program straight line/circle machine function menu
Tool-specific function 1 (tool-spec. fct. 1)

89915

Tool-specific function 2 (tool-spec. fct. 2)

89916

Tool-specific function 3 (tool-spec. fct. 3)

89917

Tool-specific function 4 (tool-spec. fct. 4)

89918

Coolant 1

89919

Coolant 2

89920

This means that text numbers 89911 and 89915 etc. refer to the same functions.

Note
The maximum number of character is 23 for the cursor texts and 14 for the
parameter texts.

Language
assignment

8-98

The text language is assigned on the basis of the text file name. xx is replaced
by one of the following abbreviations in the text file name:

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

8 Tools

12.01
8.5

Table 8-4

Example

Modify texts for tool-specific functions

Language assignment

Abbreviation
xx

Language

gr

German

uk

English

fr

French

it

Italian

sp

Spanish

nl

Dutch

fi

Finnish

sw

Swedish

pl

Polish

tr

Turkish

ch

Czech

tw

Taiwan Chinese

ko

Korean

hu

Hungarian

po

Portuguese

ru

Cyrillic

cz

Czech

yes

Japanese

The cursor text Tool-spec. function 1 in the tool list should be changed to Air
cooling.
You must make the following entry in file aluc_gr.com:
89911 0 0 Air cooling
The two parameters 2 and 3 separated by blanks are control characters for text
output and must always be set to 0.
Add the following line in section [TextFiles} of file C:\user\mbdde.ini:
UserZYK=C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

8-99

8 Tools
8.5

12.01
Modify texts for tool-specific functions

Notes

8-100

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Tool Management

9.1

Overview of functions

Option

ShopMill only runs when the tool management option is set. It is shipped with
ShopMill as standard. The option is already set in the standard machine data
record for ShopMill.
References:

/FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management

Data

Data storage and management is carried out in the NC. All data can be read
and written manually, via the NC program or by data transfer.

Operation

Operation is performed via system displays.

Programming

Tool management enables you to call the tool by name, e.g. Mill 120 mm.
The tool call is still possible via the T No. (tool number). The T No. is then the
name of the tool.

PLC

Separate PLC modules are available for tool management to handle the communication between NC and PLC.

Tools

A maximum of 250 tools can be set up on the PCU 20; on the PCU 50, the maximum number of tools is limited by MD 18082 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL.

Replacement tools

A total of 98 replacement tools can be set up for each tool.

Magazine

Chain and disk-type magazines can be managed. The maximum number of


magazines is set in the NC.
Display MD 9674 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE can be set to conceal the magazine list.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-101

9 Tool Management
9.1

12.01

Overview of functions

Location coding

Display MD 9672 $MM_CMM_FIXED_TOOL_PLACE determines whether all


tools have a fixed or variable location coding.

S Fixed assignment (MD 9672, value 1) means that the tool is permanently
assigned to a magazine location. This concept can be used for machines
with disk-type magazine.

S For variable location assignment (MD 9672, value 0), a tool with a tool number or tool name can be returned to a different magazine location from its
original one. This concept can be used for machines with chain magazine.
You can set individual tools to fixed-location-coded in the operator interface
(tool wear).

Disabling
magazine
locations

Magazine locations can be disabled, e.g. for oversized tools occupying adjacent
magazine locations.

Monitoring
functions

The tool management system includes a tool monitoring function based on tool
edges that monitors according to tool life or tool loading operations. Replacement tools (sister tools) are distinguished by their Duplo No. (DP). Display
MD 9652 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL can be set to deactivate the tool
monitoring function.

Tool management
without
Load/Unload

Setting 2 of display MD 9651 $MM_CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT can be selected to set the tool management function without a Load/Unload softkey.

Tool management
with
Load/Unload

Setting 4 of display MD 9651 $MM_CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT can be selected to set the tool management function with a Load/Unload softkey.

Loading

Loading brings the tool to its magazine location.

Unloading

Unloading removes the tool from the magazine.

Sorting

Tools can be sorted in the tool and tool wear lists according to magazine location, name and type.

Manual tools

Manual tools are tools that are stored in the tool list but not in the magazine.
These tools must be attached/detached manually to/from the spindle.

9-102

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.1

Other
functionalities

Overview of functions

S Load/unload point for tools via display MD 9673


$MM_CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION

S Number of customer M commands via display MD 9661 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES

S Display tools as diameter or radius via display MD 9663


$MM_CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM.

Modifying data
Note
Modifications to the tool and cutting edge data via system variables in the NC
program are displayed in the tool list on the ShopMill operator interface only if
they refer to the tool currently loaded in the spindle.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-103

9 Tool Management
9.2

12.01

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

9.2

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

9.2.1

Start-up sequence

Requirements

S PCU start-up is carried out and the connection set up to the NC.
S NCK start-up is carried out with the default machine data.
Execution

S Enter the NC machine data for tool management


S Create a new configuration file with the system variables for the tool management definition or use or adapt the examples from the NC toolbox. Then
load the configuration file to the control.

S Enter display machine data.


Note
Tool management start-up in the NC is carried out in conjunction with the
ShopMill start-up.

9-104

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.2

9.2.2

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

Entering the NC machine data for tool management


Machine data for the memory setting and activation of the management function
must be set.

Machine data for


memory setting

Memory space must be made available in the battery-backed RAM for the tool
management.

The following machine data must be set:


MD 18080
MD 18082
MD 18084
MD 18086

MD 18100

Activate the memory for tool management


Number of tools to be managed by the NCK
Number of magazines the NCK can manage (min. 3)
Include the buffer and loading magazines!
Number of magazine locations that the NCK can manage;
Include 3 buffer locations (2 grippers and 1 spindle) and
2 load points!
Number of cutting edges in the NCK

Note
ShopMill manages 2 cutting edges per tool. It is therefore expedient to limit the
number of edges to 2. Program the number of edges in MD 18105
MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO.

Example

Allocation of machine data when a dual gripper is used so that manual tools can
be used event when the magazine is fully allocated:
18082=40;
40 tools (30 magazine locations + 10 additional locations for
manual tools)
18084=3;
1 magazine + 1 buffer magazine + 1 load magazines
18086=35;
30 magazine slots + 3 buffer memory + 2 load points
18100=80;
80 edges

Note
The machine data settings serve only to reserve memory; locations are not
assigned to the magazine, etc. until the configuration file is set up and loaded
(see Subsection 9.2.4 Creating and loading the configuration file).
Modifying the memory-influencing machine data reformats the battery-backed
RAM. The data must therefore be backed up beforehand.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-105

9 Tool Management
9.2

12.01

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

Machine data for


activating the tool
management

In addition, the following machine data must be set for activating the tool management:
MD 20310
MD 20320
MD 22550
MD 22560
MD 22562

Channel-specific activation of the tool management


Activation of the life time monitoring for the
specified spindle
New tool offset for M function
M function for tool change
Error reaction with programmed tool change

Note
Bits 0--3 of MD 20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and MD 18080
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK must always be set identically.

Default setting

The NC machine data for tool management are contained in MD record


CMM.8X0 (for default setting see overview in Section 6.1 NC machine data for
ShopMill).
A detailed description of the NC machine data for tool management is given in
the next Subsection 9.2.3 Description of the NC machine data for the tool
management.

9-106

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.2

9.2.3

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

Description of the NC machine data for tool management

18080

MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

MD number
Activation of memory for tool management
Default setting: 0x0
Min. input limit: 0
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 1/4
Data type: DWORD
Meaning:

Max. input limit: 0xFFFF


Unit: HEX

Valid as of software version: 4.3


Activation of the tool management memory with 0 means:
The set tool management data do not use memory space.
Bit0=1: Memory is provided for tool management-specific data
Bit1=1: Memory is provided for monitoring data
Bit2=1: Memory is provided for user data (CC data)
Bit3=1: Memory is provided for considering the adjacent location
Bit4=1: D-RAM is provided for Complex searching for tools in magazines.
Bit5=1: Wear monitor active (SW5 and later, 840D)
Bit6=1: Wear grouping available (SW5 and later, 840D)
The coded type of memory reservation enables economic use of the memory
management for the functionality provided.
Example:
Default memory reservation for TM:
MD = 3 (Bit0 + 1=1)
MD = 1 means TM without TM monitoring function data

18082

MM_NUM_TOOL

MD number

Number of tools the NCK can manage

Default setting: 30

Min. input limit: 0

Max. input limit: 600

Changes valid from: POWER ON

Protection level: 2/4

Data type: DWORD

Valid as of software version: 2

Unit: ----

Meaning:

The number of tools which the NCK can manage is entered here.
Battery-backed memory is reserved for the number of tools.

Further references:

Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7), Tool Offset (W1)

18084

MM_NUM_MAGAZINE

MD number

Number of magazines the NCK can manage

Default setting: 3

Min. input limit: 0

Max. input limit: 32

Changes valid from: POWER ON

Protection level: 2/4

Data type: DWORD

Valid as of software version: 2

Meaning:

Unit: ----

Number of magazines the NCK can manage (active and background magazines). This
MD can be used to reserve battery-backed memory for the magazines.
Important: One load magazine and a buffer magazine is set up in the tool management for
each TOA unit. These magazines must be taken into account.
Value = 0: The tool management cannot be active because no data could be created.

Further references:

Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7)

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-107

9 Tool Management
9.2

12.01

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

18086

MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION

MD number

Number of magazine locations the NCK can manage

Default setting: 10

Min. input limit: 0

Max. input limit: 600

Changes valid from: POWER ON

Protection level: 2/4

Data type: DWORD

Valid as of software version: 2

Unit: ----

Meaning:

This MD reserves battery-backed memory for the magazine locations. The number of
buffers and load points must also be set up here.
Important: The locations in the buffer and a load magazine must be taken into account.
Value = 0: The tool management cannot be active because no data could be created.

Further references:

Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7)

18100
MD number

MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Number of tool cutting edges per TOA module

Default setting: 30

Min. input limit: 0

Max. input limit: 600

Changes valid from: POWER ON

Protection level: 2/4

Data type: DWORD

Valid as of software version: 2

Unit: ----

Meaning:

Number of possible cutting edges in TOA area. TOA area is the total number of all TOA
modules (for active tool management, also the magazine modules) in the NCK.

Further references:

Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7)

20310
TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD number
Channel-specific activation of tool management
Default setting: 0x0, ...
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 0xFFFFF
Change valid after POWER ON
Protection level: 2/4
Unit: HEX
Data type: DWORD
Valid as of software version: 2
Meaning:
MD = 0:
Tool management inactive
Bit0=1:
Tool management active
The tool management functions are activated for the current channel.
Bit1=1:
Tool management monitoring functions active
The functions required for monitoring the tools (tool life and quantity) are
activated.
Bit2=1:
OEM functions active
The memory for user data can be used
(see also MD 18090 to 18098 )
Bit3=1:
Consider adjacent location active
Bits0 to 3 must be set identically to MD 18080
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.
Bit4=1:
The PLC is able to request a tool change preparation again with modified
parameters.
Parts program is retained for T selection or M06 until acknowledged by the PLC
program
Bit5=1:
Bit5=0:
Bit6=1:
Bit6=0:

9-108

The master spindle main run can be stopped within one OB1 cycle
(e.g. by read-in stop) after output of a tool command.
The master spindle main run continues after command output to the PLC.
The secondary spindle main run can be stopped within one OB1 cycle
(e.g. by read-in stop) after output of a tool command.
The master spindle main run continues after command output to the PLC.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.2

20310
MD number
Meaning:

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Channel-specific activation of tool management
Bit7=1:
The master spindle main run is stopped until acknowledgement via FC7, FC8
with status 1... .
Bit7=0:
The master spindle main run continues after command output to the PLC.
Bit8=1:
The secondary spindle main run is stopped until acknowledgement via FC7,
FC8 with status 1.
Bit8=0:
The secondary spindle main run continues after command output to the PLC.
Bit9:
ReservedBit10=1: M06 is delayed until the tool change has been prepared
via FC8 (status 1...) by the PLC.
The change signal (e.g. M06) is not output until the tool selection
(DBX [ n+0 ].2) is acknowledged. The parts program is stopped until the
T selection is acknowledged.
Bit10=0:
The tool change ON command is not output from NCK--> PLC until the
PLC preparation acknowledgement has been received.
This acknowledgement is relevant for PLC command 3 (i.e. programming of
M06 in a block that does not contain a T).
Bit11=1:
The preparatory command is also output even if it has already been output
once for the same tool.
This is useful for positioning the chain when Tx is called for the first time
and checking whether the tool is located in the correct change position (e.g.
in front of the change station).
Bit11=0:
The preparatory command can be output only once for each tool.
Bit12=1:
The preparatory command is also carried out even if the tool is already in
the spindle.
This means that the T selection signal (DB72.DBXn.2) is set even if it has
already been set for the same tool.
(Tx...Tx)
Bit12=0:
The preparatory command is not executed if thetool
is already mounted in the spindle.
Bit13=1:
Only on systems with sufficient memory capacity. Recording of tool sequences
in a diagnostics buffer.
On Reset the commands from the diagnostics buffer are stored in the passive
file system (NCATR xx.MPF under parts program).
This file is required by the Hotline.
Tool sequences are recorded in the diagnostics buffer only on systems with
sufficient memory capacity (NCU572, NCU573).
Bit14=1:
An automatic tool change takes place in response to Reset and Start
according to settings in the following machine data
20120 MD20120 TOOL_RESET_NAME
20110 MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
20124 MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER.
If the tool defined in TOOL_RESET_NAME must be loaded (set via
RESET_MODE_MASK), a selection and tool change command are output to
the user interface (DB72) with RESET or START.
If RESET_MODE_MASK is set to leave the active tool in the spindle, and if the
active tool is disabled in the spindle (by user), a change command for a
replacement tool is output to the user interface. If no replacement tool is
available, an error message is output.
Bit14=0:
No automatic tool change takes place in response to RESET and START.
Bit15=1:
The tool is not returned if several preparatory commands are output (Tx-->Tx).
This mode of function activation permits a variety of function combinations.
Example for default activation of the tool management:
MD 20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 3 (Bit0 + 1 = 1)
Bit16=1: T location number is active
Bit15=0:
The tool is not returned.
Bit16=1:
T location number is active
Bit17=1:
Tool life decrementation can be started/stopped via the PLC in channel
DB 2.1...DBx 1.3.
Bit18=1:
Activation of monitoring function last tool in tool group.
Bit18=0:
No monitoring for last tool in tool group
Bit19=1:
Activation for bits 5...8
Bit19=0:
The functions described under bits 5...8 are not available.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-109

9 Tool Management
9.2

12.01

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

20310
MD number
Meaning:

TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Channel-specific activation of tool management
Bit20=0:
The generated commands are not output to the PLC in response to PLC signal
Program testing active. The NCK acknowledges the commands itself.
Magazine and tool data are not changed. Exception: The tool status of
the tool activated in the test area can change to active.
Bit20=1:
The generated commands are output to the PLC in response to PLC signal
Program testing active. Depending on the type of PLC acknowledgement,
tool/magazine data in the NCK can be altered at the same time. If the
acknowledgement parameters for the target magazine are set to the same
values as the source magazine, the tool is not transported and thus no data
modified in the NCK. Exception: The tool status of the tool activated in the test
area can change to active.
Bit21=0:
Ignore tool status W when selecting a tool.
Bit21=1:
Tools with W status cannot be selected by another tool change, tool
preparatory command.

20320
TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK
MD number
Activation of life time monitoring for the spindle specified here
Default setting: 1/2
Min. input limit: 1
Max. input limit: 4
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 2/4
Unit: ---Data type: DWORD
Valid as of software version: 2
Meaning:
Value = 1: Monitoring is carried out for spindle 1.
Value = 2: Monitoring is carried out for spindle 1 and spindle 2.
Further references:

Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7)

22550
TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
MD number
New tool offset for M function
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: POWER ON
Protection level: 2/4
Unit: ---Data type: BYTE
Valid as of software version: 1.1
Meaning:

Corresponding to ...

A tool is selected in the program with the T function. Whether the new tool is changed
immediately with the T function depends on the setting in this MD:
MD = 0
The new tool is changed immediately with the T function. This setting is used mainly for
turning machines with tool revolver.
MD = 1
The new tool is prepared for changing with the T function. This setting is mainly used on
milling machines with tool magazine to move the new tool to the tool change position in
parallel with machining (i.e. machining operation is not interrupted).
The old tool is removed from the spindle and the new tool loaded to it by means of the M
function entered in the MD. According to DIN 66025, this tool change must be
programmed with the M function M06.
MD 22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE

Further references:

Description of Functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)

9-110

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.2

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

22560
TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
MD number
M function for tool change
Default setting: 6
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 9999 9999
Change takes effect after POWER ON
Protection level: 2/4
Unit: -Data type: DWORD
Valid as of software version: 1.1
Meaning:
If the T function is used only to prepare a new tool for tool change (for milling machines with
tool magazine, this setting is mainly used to bring the new tool to the tool change position in
parallel with the machining time), the tool change must be initiated with a further M function.
The M function entered in the MD initiates the tool change (remove old tool from the spindle
and load the new tool in the spindle). According to DIN 66025, this tool change must be
programmed with the M function M06.
Corresponding to...
MD 22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
Further references:
Description of Functions: Tool Offset (W1)

22562
TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE
MD number
Error reaction with programmed tool change
Default setting: 0
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 3
Change takes effect after POWER ON
Protection level: 2/4
Unit: -Data type: DWORD
Valid as of software version: 5.1
Meaning:
If MD 22550 is set to 0, the default setting of MD 22562 should not be altered.
Bit0=0: Standard response:
The program stops in the NC block containing the error.
Bit0=1: If the error occurs in the block containing the tool change preparation command,
the alarm activated by the preparation command (T) is ignored until the program
run reaches the point at which the associated tool change command (M06) is
interpreted.
The alarm activated by the preparation command is not output until this moment.
The user cannot therefore make any corrections until this program block is
reached.
Bit1=0: With active tool management only:
In preparing tool changes, the NCK detects only tools with data assigned to a
magazine.
Bit1=1: With active tool management only:
The NCK also loads a tool whose data are stored in the NCK, but to which no
magazine is assigned.
In this case, the NCK attempts to assign the tool data to the programmed spindle
location automatically.
If several usable tools are available, another search is started for an active tool.
If no active tool can be found, the tool with the lowest duplo number is selected.
Bit2=0
Active D no. > 0 and active T no. = 0 equals an offset of zero
Active DL no. > 0 and active D no. = 0 equals a total offset of zero
Bit2=1
Active D no. > 0 and active T no. = 0 generates an alarm message
Active DL no. > 0 and active D no. = 0 generates an alarm message
Corresponding to...
MD 22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
Further references:
Description of Functions: Tool Offset (W1)

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-111

9 Tool Management
9.2

12.01

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

9.2.4

Creating and loading the configuration file

To start up the tool management function, you must create a configuration file
and load it to the NC.
Create a new configuration file with the system variables for the tool management definition or adapt the examples from the toolbox.

Note
With the PCU 50, you can also set up the configuration file on the CNC ISO
operator interface.
References:

/FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management

The configuration file must include the following settings:

S Define the type of search strategy


S Define the real magazine
S Define buffer magazine
S Define load magazine
S Define locations for the real magazine
S Define locations for the buffer magazine
S Define the spindle assignment
S Define the locations for the load magazine
S Define the distances for the real magazine
Load the configuration file to the NC.

Examples

The following examples can be found in tools\sd in the toolbox:

S TM_WO_GR.8X0 (configuration without dual gripper) with the following contents:


--

1 real magazine with 30 locations

--

1 spindle

--

2 load points

S TM_W_GR.8X0 (configuration with dual gripper) with the following contents:


--

1 real magazine with 30 locations

--

1 spindle

--

2 grippers

--

2 load points

If necessary, adapt the configuration files in the lines typed in bold print.

9-112

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.2

Display of the
configuration file
TM_W_GR.8X0

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

%_N_TO_TMA_INI
CHANDATA (1)
;------------------;Magazine configuration
;------------------;Delete old data
;---------------$TC_MAP1 [0]=0
$TC_DP1 [0,0]=0
;Type of search strategy
;----------------$TC_MAMP2=257
; Search for active tools from
,1st location onwards
;Magazine definition
;-------------;Real magazine
$TC_MAP1 [1]=1
$TC_MAP3 [1]=17

$TC_MAP6 [1]=1
$TC_MAP7 [1]=30
;Buffer magazine
$TC_MAP1 [9998]=7
$TC_MAP3 [9998]=17
$TC_MAP6 [9998]=1
$TC_MAP7 [9998]=3
;Load magazine
$TC_MAP1 [9999]=9
$TC_MAP3 [9999]=17
$TC_MAP6 [9999]=1
$TC_MAP7 [9999]=2

; magazine kind (1: chain)


; magazine status (17:
active magazine
; activate for loading)
; number of magazine tiers
; number of magazine locations
; magazine kind (7: buffer)

; number of buffer locations


; (3: Spindle with dual gripper)
; magazine kind (9: load magazine)

; number of load points

;Locations in real magazine


;-----------------------------;Location No. 1
$TC_MPP1 [1,1]=1
$TC_MPP2
$TC_MPP3
$TC_MPP4
$TC_MPP5
No. 1)

[1,1]=1
[1,1]=1
[1,1]=2
[1,1]=1

;Location No. 2
$TC_MPP1 [1,2]=1
$TC_MPP2
$TC_MPP3
$TC_MPP4
$TC_MPP5

[1,2]=1
[1,2]=1
[1,2]=2
[1,2]=2

; location kind
(1: magazine location)
; location type
; consider adjacent location (1: on)
; location status (2: location free)
; location kind index (1: location

; location kind
(1: magazine location)
; location type
; consider adjacent location (1: on)
; location status (2: location free)
; location type index
(2: location No. 2)

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-113

9 Tool Management
9.2

12.01

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

;Location No. 3
$TC_MPP1 [1,3]=1
$TC_MPP2 [1,3]=1
$TC_MPP3 [1,3]=1
$TC_MPP4 [1,3]=2
$TC_MPP5 [1,3]=3
No. 3)
.
.
.
;Location No. 29
$TC_MPP1 [1,29]=1
$TC_MPP2 [1,29]=1
$TC_MPP3 [1,29]=1
$TC_MPP4 [1,29]=2
$TC_MPP5 [1,29]=29
No. 29)
;Location no. 30
$TC_MPP1 [1,30]=1

; location kind
(1: magazine location)
; location type
; consider adjacent location (1: on)
; location status (2: location free)
; location kind index (3: location

; location kind
(1: magazine location)
; location type
; consider adjacent location (1: on)
; location status (2: location free)
; location kind index (29: location

; location kind
(1: magazine location)
$TC_MPP2 [1,30]=1
;location type
$TC_MPP3 [1,30]=1
; consider adjacent location (1: on)
$TC_MPP4 [1,30]=2
; location status (2: free location)
$TC_MPP5 [1,30]=30
; location kind index
(30: location No. 30)
;Locations in buffer magazine
;--------------------------------;spindle
$TC_MPP1 [9998,1]=2
; location kind (2: spindle)
$TC_MPP2 [9998,1]=0
; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9998,1]=0
; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9998,1]=2
; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9998,1]=1
; location kind index
(1: location No. 1)
;Gripper 1
$TC_MPP1 [9998,2]=3
; location kind (3: gripper)
$TC_MPP2 [9998,2]=0
; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9998,2]=0
; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9998,2]=2
; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9998,2]=1
; location kind index
(1: location No. 1)
;Gripper 2
$TC_MPP1 [9998,3]=3
; location kind (3: gripper)
$TC_MPP2 [9998,3]=0
; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9998,3]=0
; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9998,3]=2
; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9998,3]=2
; location type index
(2: location No. 2)
;Assignment of buffers to spindle
;------------------------------------$TC_MLSR [2,1]=0
; 1st gripper
$TC_MLSR [3,1]=0
; 2nd gripper
;Locations on load magazine
;----------------------;1st load magazine
$TC_MPP1 [9999,1]=7
; location kind (7: load point)
$TC_MPP2 [9999,1]=0
; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9999,1]=0
; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9999,1]=2
; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9999,1]=1
; location kind index
(1: location No. 1)

9-114

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.2

;2nd loading station


$TC_MPP1 [9999,2]=7
$TC_MPP2 [9999,2]=0
$TC_MPP3 [9999,2]=0
$TC_MPP4 [9999,2]=2
$TC_MPP5 [9999,2]=2

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

; location kind (7: load point)


; location type
; consider adjacent location
; location status (2: location free)
; location type index
(2: location No. 2)

;Distances between load points/buffer and real; magazine


;----------------------------------------------------$TC_MDP2
$TC_MDP2
$TC_MDP2
$TC_MDP1
$TC_MDP1

[1,1]=0
[1,2]=0
[1,3]=0
[1,1]=0
[1,2]=0

;
;
;
;
;

spindle
gripper 1
gripper 2
1st load point
2nd load point

M17

Brief description
of variables

The description of variables given below refers to the configuration file in the
toolbox. You can find other descriptions of variables in:
References:

Magazine data
$TC_MAP1

Magazine data
$TC_MAP3

/FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management:

$TC_MAP1[MagazineNo]= Magazine type

S
S
S
S
S

1: chain
3: revolver
5: flat magazine
7: internal magazine tool buffer
9: internal magazine loading station

$TC_MAP3[MagazineNo]= magazine status


Bit mask (specification applies for bit=1):

S
S
S
S
S

Bit0: active magazine


Bit1: blocked
Bit2: magazine is at load position
Bit3: tool motion is active
Bit4: enabled for loading

Default = 17 means: active magazine, enabled for loading

Magazine data
$TC_MAP6

Number of magazines (in this case: 1)

Magazine data
$TC_MAP7

Number of locations
e.g. number of buffer locations: 3 = 1 spindle and 2 grippers

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-115

9 Tool Management
9.2

12.01

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

Search strategy
$TC_MAMP2

$TC_MAMP2= Type of search strategy


This mask is divided into a right and left byte,

S the right byte describes the tool search (bits0 and 1)


S the left byte describes the empty location search for the spindle tool.
A value must be specified for both strategies.
Bit mask (specification applies for bit=1):

S Bit0: search for active tool with designation (1)


S Bit1: search for next tool with designation (2)
S Bit8: search from 1st location onwards (256)
S Bit9: search from current location onwards (512)
S Bit10: search from last location backwards (1024)
S Bit11: search from current location backwards (2048)
S Bit12: search from current location symmetrically (4096)
Example: $TC_MAMP2=4097 (bit12 and bit0=1)
Bit12: Search for empty location: search from current location symmetrically,
Bit0: Tool search: search for active tool

Location kind
$TC_MPP1

$TC_MPP1[MagazineNo, LocNo]= location kind:

S 1 = magazine location
S 2 = spindle
S 3 = gripper
S 4 = loader
S 5 = transfer location
S 6 = loading station
S 7 = load point
Default: value of corresponding location type

Location type
$TC_MPP2

9-116

$TC_MPP2[MagazineNo, LocNo]= Location type:


Any values can be entered here. The values must match the tools to be loaded
at the location.
Buffer and load point have the value 0!

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.2

Consider adjacent
location $TC_MPP3

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

$TC_MPP3[MagazineNo, LocNo]= Consider adjacent location on = 1

S Value = 1: the adjacent location is considered for the location


S Value = 0: the adjacent location is not considered for the location
S Value = 0: is to be entered for buffer and load locations!

Location status
$TC_MPP4

$TC_MPP4[MagazineNo, LocNo]= Location status (bit mask)

S Bit0: blocked
S Bit1: free/allocated
Default: 2 = location free

Location kind index


$TC_MPP5

$TC_MPP5[Magazine No., Location No.]= Location kind index


For $TC_MPP1[Magazine No., Location No.]=1 (location kind is the magazine
location), the location number is entered here. For other location kinds, the kind
index is incremented:
Example with 2 grippers with location kind 3

S the first gripper has location index 1


S the second gripper has location index 2
Distances to magazine

Distances to magazine
$TC_MDP2[MagazineNo, BUFFno.]= Distances between buffer and magazine
A value must be entered for each buffer, at least a zero. The value is not interpreted here but is used only for assignment.
$TC_MDP1[MagazineNo, LoadpointNo]= Distances between load points and
magazine
One value must be entered for each load location here. It is interpreted when
calculating the location before the load point. Only for Load point for spindle
(location 1) is the value not interpreted but used only for magazine assignment.

Spindle assignment

$TC_MLSR[LocationNo of BUFF, LocationNo of spindle]= Assignment between buffer and spindle.


This enables determination of which buffer, e.g. gripper, may carry out tool
change to the spindle.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-117

9 Tool Management
9.2

9.2.5

12.01

Start-up of the tool management in the NC

Entering display machine data for tool management

Display machine
data

Display machine data enable you to activate certain functions and settings at
the user interface.
MD 9651 Tool management concept
MD 9652 Tool monitoring
MD 9661 Number of customer M commands
MD 9663 Display radius/diameter for tool
MD 9667 Tool preselection active
MD 9672 Fixed location
MD 9673 Number of loading station
MD 9674 Display magazine list

Default setting/
description

9-118

The default setting and machine data description can be found in Section 6.2
Display machine data for ShopMill.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.3

Tool management start-up in the PLC

9.3

Tool management start-up in the PLC

9.3.1

Overview

General

NCK

Tool
management

PLC

FC6
Basic
program
block

DB4
Basic
program
block

User
program

DB71
DB72
User
interface

User
program
OB1
.
.
FB110,
DB110

DB74
Internal
interface

OB100
.
.
FC100

Acknowledgement/Status
FC8
Basic
program
block

Fig. 9-1

Overview of tool management

FC6 supplies data blocks DB71/72 with the information for the new and old
tools. FC6 is called by the basic program and need not be called again in the
user program.
So that the tool management always knows where the current tool is located,
each location change must be notified to the tool management via FC8 (transfer
block). FC8 (transfer block) is called by the user program (FB110).
The data blocks DB71/72 and 74 are set up automatically. The lengths of the
data blocks are determined by the parameters for the tool management in DB4.
These are written by the user program (FC100).

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-119

9 Tool Management
9.3

12.01

Tool management start-up in the PLC

9.3.2

Start-up sequence

Requirements

S PCU start-up is carried out and the connection set up to the NC.
S NCK start-up is carried out with the NC machine data for ShopMill.
S The standard basic program is loaded.
Execution

S Adapt one of the following source files and compile it:


--

TM_WO_GR.AWL (data transfer without dual gripper)

--

TM_W_GR.AWL (data transfer with dual gripper)

Source files TM_WO_GR.AWL and TM_W_GR.AWL contain the following


blocks
--

FC100 (block for tool management configuration)

--

FB110, DB110 (blocks for data transfer in tool management)

The blocks for transferring tool management data (FB110, DB110) must be
adapted to suit the individual machine.

S Call the blocks in OB1 and OB100:


--

Call FC100 in OB100 (before FB1)

--

Call FB110 in OB1 (after FC30)

The specified call sequence for these blocks is mandatory.

S Load the blocks to the PLC


Note
Tool management start-up in the PLC is carried out in conjunction with ShopMill
start-up.

9-120

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.3

9.3.3

Tool management start-up in the PLC

Description of blocks

General

Two STL sources are available for tool management in the ShopMill library:

S TM_WO_GR.AWL (data transfer without dual gripper) with contents


--

FC100 (tool management configuration)

--

FB110 (data transfer for tool management in standard mode)

S TM_W_GR.AWL (data transfer with dual gripper) with contents


--

FC100 (tool management configuration)

--

FB110 (data transfer for tool management in standard mode)

The block for configuration of the tool management (FC 100) is identical in both
STL sources. The block for data transfer for tool management in standard mode
(FB110) is different in both STL sources.

FC100

Block FC100 transfers the configuration data of the tool management to DB4
and must be called in OB100.
The configuration data are preset for 2 load points (DB71) and one spindle
(DB72).
The Real MagLoc parameter of FC100 (number of locations of the real magazine) must be supplied when FC100 is called so that FC22 (direction selection)
can be used.

FB110

Block FB110 controls the data transfer for tool management in standard mode.
This block must be called in OB1. Data module DB110 (instance DB) must be
loaded.
The block includes the following functions:

S Acknowledge load/unload/relocate for 1st load point


S Acknowledge load/unload for 1st load point
S Acknowledge prepare/change for 1st spindle
S Abort, i.e. negative acknowledgment for the above-mentioned functions
The acknowledgment for this function can be enabled by the PLC via the input
parameter of FB110, e.g. load/unload via customer key (see table below for
input parameters).

Data transfer
without dual gripper

FB110 from the AWL source TM_WO_GR.AWL may be used for data transfer
without dual gripper.
Tool change from the magazine to the spindle is carried out in one step here.
The tool magazine is changed directly into the spindle.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-121

9 Tool Management
9.3

12.01

Tool management start-up in the PLC

Table 9-1
Signal

Input parameters of FB110 from TM_WO_GR.AWL


Type

Default

Remarks

Prepare_IF1

BOOL

TRUE

Enable preparation for spindle 1

Change_IF1

BOOL

TRUE

Enable change for spindle 1

Load_IF1

BOOL

TRUE

Enable loading for load point 1

Unload_IF1

BOOL

TRUE

Enable unloading for load point 1

Relocate_IF1

BOOL

TRUE

Enable relocation for load point 1

Load_IF2

BOOL

TRUE

Enable loading for load point 2

Unload_IF2

BOOL

TRUE

Enable unloading for load point 2

Reset_IF

BOOL

FALSE

Abort for one of the above-mentioned functions

Note
MD 9673 CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION defines the interface via which the
magazine will be loaded or unloaded.

Data transfer with


dual gripper

FB110 from the AWL source TM_W_GR.AWL may be used for data transfer
with dual gripper.
The tool change is carried out in two steps by the magazine in the spindle. The
tool is first moved from the magazine to the gripper and then onto the spindle.
Table 9-2
Signal

9-122

Input parameters of FB110 from TM_W_GR.AWL


Type

Default

Remarks

Prepare_IF1

BOOL

TRUE

Enable preparation for spindle 1

Change1_IF1

BOOL

TRUE

Enable change step 1 (via gripper 1/2) for


spindle 1

Change2_IF1

BOOL

TRUE

Enable change step 2 (via gripper 1/2) for


spindle 1

Load_IF1

BOOL

TRUE

Enable loading for load point 1

Unload_IF1

BOOL

TRUE

Enable unloading for load point 1

Relocate_IF1

BOOL

TRUE

Enable relocation for load point 1

Load_IF2

BOOL

TRUE

Enable loading for load point 2

Unload_IF2

BOOL

TRUE

Enable unloading for load point 2

Reset_IF

BOOL

FALSE

Abort for one of the above-mentioned functions

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.3

Tool management start-up in the PLC

Note
MD 9673 CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION defines which interface will be
loaded/unloaded.

9.3.4

Signal description

Overview of
data blocks

The following data blocks are used for tool management purposes:
DB71
DB72
DB74

for load/unload points


for spindle as change position
internal data block for tool management

If the data of magazines, buffer memories or loading positions are changed in


the start-up branch, then data blocks DB71 to DB74 must be deleted and the
PLC restarted.

Description of
DB71
DB71

Signals of load/unload points

Data block
Byte

NCK-->PLC interface
Bit7

Bit6

Bit5

Bit4

Bit3

Bit2

Bit1

Bit0

Interfaces
DBB 0

INT 8

INT 7

INT 6

INT 5

INT 4

INT 3

INT 2

INT 1

DBB 1

INT 16

INT 15

INT 14

INT 13

INT 12

INT 11

INT 10

INT 9

NC program
positions
magazine

Position at
load point

Relocate

Unload

Load

DBB 2, 3
DBB n + 0

DBB

n+1

Unassigned

DBB

n+2

Assigned channel (8bit-Int)

DBB

n+3

Tool management number (8bit-Int)

DBD

n+4

$P_VDITCP[0]
User parameter 0 (DWord)

DBD

n+8

$P_VDITCP[1]
User parameter 1 (DWord)

DBD

n + 12

$P_VDITCP[2]
User parameter 2 (DWord)

DBW

n + 16

Identifier for load/unload point (Int), (fixed value 9999)

DBW

n + 18

Location no. of load/unload point (Int)

DBW

n + 20

Magazine no. (source) for loading/relocation/positioning (Int)

DBW

n + 22

Location no. (source) for loading/relocation/positioning (Int)

DBW
DBW
DBW

n + 24
n + 26
n + 28

Magazine no. (target) for loading/relocation/positioning (Int)


Location no. (target) for loading/relocation/positioning (Int)
Spare

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-123

9 Tool Management
9.3

12.01

Tool management start-up in the PLC

Initial addresses of load/unload points:


Load/unload point

1:
2:
3:
4:

n=4
n = 34
n = 64
n = 94

Example calculation of address DBW n+24 (magazine no. target)


n = (m--1) * len + 4
m=2;

len = 30

m = location no. of loading location/point


len = 30 (length of a load point)
n = (2--1) * 30 + 4 ==> n = 34
DBW (34 + 24) = DBW 58

Address for magazine no. target of 2nd load point is DBW 58.
Load point 1 is intended for loading/unloading in all spindles. This must be
taken into account in the load interface assignment (applies to PCU 20; automatically taken into account in PCU 50). Load point 1 is also used for relocation/positioning of tools in any location (e.g. buffer location).

9-124

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.3

Tool management start-up in the PLC

Description of
DB72
DB72

Spindle as change point

Data block

NCK-->PLC interface
Byte

Bit7

Bit6

Bit5

Bit4

Bit3

Bit2

Bit1

Bit0

DBB 0

INT 8

INT 7

INT 6

INT 5

INT 4

INT 3

INT 2

INT 1

DBB 1

INT 16

INT 15

INT 14

INT 13

INT 12

INT 11

INT 10

INT 9

Spare

Detach
manual tool

Attach
manual
tool

OldTool in
BL No.
(n+42)

TO

Prepare
change

Change tool
(initiated by:
M06)

Obligatory change

Enable

Active
tool

DBB 2, 3
DBB

n+0

DBB

n+1

Unassigned

DBB

n+2

Assigned channel (8bit-Int)

DBB

n+3

Tool management number (8bit-Int)

DBD

n+4

$P_VDITCP[0]
User parameter 0 (DWord)

DBD

n+8

$P_VDITCP[1]
User parameter 1 (DWord)

DBD

n + 12

$P_VDITCP[2]
User parameter 2 (DWord)

DBW

n + 16

Buffer identifier (Int), fixed value 9998)


equals Target position for new tool

DBW

n + 18

Relative location (target) in buffer magazine (Int)

DBW

n + 20

Magazine no. (source) for new tool (Int)

DBW

n + 22

Location no. (source) for new tool (Int)

DBW

n + 24

Magazine no. (target) for old tool (Int)

DBW

n + 26

Location no. (target) for old tool (Int)

DBW

n + 28

New tool: Location type (Int)

DBW

n + 30

New tool: Size left (Int)

DBW

n + 32

New tool: Size right (Int)

DBW

n + 34

New tool: Size top (Int)

DBW

n + 36

New tool: Size bottom (Int)

DBW

n + 38

Tool status for new tool


Tool has
been used

DBW
DBW
DBW
DBW

n + 40
n + 42
n + 44
n + 46

Tool with
fixed loc.
code

Prewarn
lim.
reached

Measure
tool

tool

New tool: Internal T no. of NCK (Int)


If DBX (n+0.4) = 1, then the buffer location of the old tool must be entered here
Spare
Spare

Initial addresses of spindles:

n = (m--1)* len + 4

Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
m = location no. of change position
len= 48

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-125

9 Tool Management
9.3

12.01

Tool management start-up in the PLC

Note
DBB (n+1) to DBW (n+46) are updated with a T selection only.

A description of data blocks DB71 and DB74 can be found in


References:
/FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management:

DB72
DBX 0.0 - 0.15
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Signal state 1
Signal state 0

DB72
DBB(n+0)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

Active status of interface 1-- 16


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2
Associated interface has a valid block, a tool change request has been initiated.
Process for this interface is complete.

Tool change information


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Bit0: Obligatory change
Bit1: Change tool (initiated by M06)
Bit2: Prepare change
Bit3: T 0 is programmed
Bit4: Old tool in buffer number (n+42)
Bit5: Attach manual tool
Bit6: Detach manual tool
Bit7: Spare

Signal(s) valid as of software version: 5

Note
The bits in DBB (n+0) ( prepare change, change tool,...) are not reset by the
system. They are up-to-date only if the appropriate interface bit in DBB0 is set
to 1. However, the bits can be reset by the user if necessary.

DB72
DBB(n+2)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

Assigned channel
Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Channel no. to which active interface applies

DB72
DBB(n+3)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

Tool management no.


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Associated tool management number

9-126

Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2

Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.3

Tool management start-up in the PLC

DB72
DBD(n+4)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

User parameter 0 (DInt)


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2
$P_VDITCP[0]=(value); can be programmed to transfer a value to the PLC via the parts program.

DB72
DBD(n+8)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

User parameter 1 (DInt)


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2
$P_VDITCP[1]=(value); can be programmed to transfer a value to the PLC via the parts program.

DB72
DBD(n+12)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

User parameter 2 (DInt)


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2
$P_VDITCP[2]=(value); can be programmed to transfer a value to the PLC via the parts program.

DB72
DBW(n+16)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

Buffer magazine no. (fixed value 9998) target position for new tool
Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2
Magazine no. 9998 for all buffer magazines, target magazine for new tool

DB72
DBW(n+18)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

DB72
DBW(n+20)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning
Corresponding to...

DB72
DBW(n+22)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning
Corresponding to...

Location in buffer magazine (spindle)


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2
Location of buffer magazine to which the new tool must be loaded. This is normally the spindle.
The location number defined for this particular buffer during start-up is output.

Magazine no. (source) for new tool


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Source magazine no. of new tool
DBW(n+22)

Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2

Location no. (source) for new tool


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Source location no. of new tool
DBW(n+20)

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2

9-127

9 Tool Management
9.3

12.01

Tool management start-up in the PLC

DB72
DBW(n+24)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning
Corresponding to...

Magazine no. (target) for old tool


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Number of magazine to which old tool must be loaded.
DBW(n+26)

Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2

DB72
DBW(n+26)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning
Corresponding to...

Location no. (target) for old tool


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Number of location to which old tool must be loaded.
DBW(n+26)

Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2

DB72
DBW(n+28)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning
Corresponding to...

New tool: Location type


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
The location type of the new tool is entered here.
Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom

Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2

DB72
DBW(n+30)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

New tool: Size left


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2
Specification of tool size on left in half-locations for new tool.

DB72
DBW(n+32)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

New tool: Size right


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2
Specification of tool size on right in half-locations for new tool.

DB72
DBW(n+34)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

New tool: Size top


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2
Specification of tool size at top in half-locations for new tool.

DB72
DBW(n+36)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

New tool: Size bottom


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2
Specification of tool size at bottom in half-locations for new tool.

9-128

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.3

DB72
DBW(n+38)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

DB72
DBW(n+40)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

DB72
DBW(n+42)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

DB72
DBW(n+44)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

DB72
DBW(n+46)
Data block
Edge evaluation:
Meaning

Tool status for new tool


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Bit0: Active tool
Bit1: Tool enabled
Bit2: Tool disabled
Bit3: Measure tool
Bit4: Prewarning limit reached
Bit6: Tool is fixed-location-coded
Bit7: Tool has been used

New tool: Internal T no. of NCK


Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Display of internal T no. of NCK for the new tool.

Tool management start-up in the PLC

Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2

Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2

Reserved
Signal(s)
Signal(s) updated:

Signal(s) valid as of software version:

Signal(s) updated:

Signal(s) valid as of software version:

Signal(s) updated:

Signal(s) valid as of software version:

Reserved
Signal(s)

Reserved
Signal(s)

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-129

9 Tool Management
9.4

9.4

12.01

Examples

Examples
The examples show how to

S use the configuration files (TM_WO_GR.8X0 and TM_W_GR.8X0) and where they have to be adapted if appropriate.

S use the STL sources (TM_WO_GR.AWL and TM_W_GR.AWL) and where


the blocks generated must be called.

9.4.1

Example 1: Machine with disk-type magazine

Precondition

Set NC machine
data

Disk-type magazine with 30 locations: Tool change is carried out directly in the
spindle.

Table 9-3

NC machine data for ShopMill

NC MD
number
18086

Adapting the
configuration file

Name
$MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION

Value
35

Match the configuration file TM_WO_GR.8X0 (configuration without dual


gripper) at the points marked in bold type and load into the NC.
%_N_TO_TMA_INI
CHANDATA (1)
;------------------;Magazine configuration
;------------------;Delete old data
;---------------$TC_MAP1 [0]=0
$TC_DP1 [0,0]=0
;Type of search strategy
;----------------$TC_MAMP2=257
; Search for active tools
; from 1st location onwards
;Magazine definition
;-------------;Real magazine
$TC_MAP1 [1]=1
$TC_MAP3 [1]=17

$TC_MAP6 [1]=1
$TC_MAP7 [1]=30

9-130

;
;
;
;
;
;

magazine kind (1: chain)


magazine status (17: active
magazine, enable for
loading)
number of magazine tiers
number of magazine locations

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01

9.4

;Buffer magazine
$TC_MAP1 [9998]=7
$TC_MAP3 [9998]=17
$TC_MAP6 [9998]=1
$TC_MAP7 [9998]=1

Examples

; magazine kind (7: buffer)

; number of buffer locations


; (1: spindle)

;Load magazine
$TC_MAP1 [9999]=9
; magazine kind (9: load magazine)
$TC_MAP3 [9999]=17
$TC_MAP6 [9999]=1
$TC_MAP7 [9999]=2
; number of load points
;Locations in real magazine
;-----------------------------;Location No. 1
$TC_MPP1 [1,1]=1
; location kind (1: magazine location)
$TC_MPP2 [1,1]=1
; location type
$TC_MPP3 [1,1]=1
; consider adjacent location (1: active)
$TC_MPP4 [1,1]=2
; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [1,1]=1
; location kind index
(1: Location no. 1)
.
.
.
;Location No.30
$TC_MPP1 [1,30]=1
$TC_MPP2
$TC_MPP3
tive)
$TC_MPP4
$TC_MPP5

[1,30]=1
[1,30]=1

; location kind
(1: magazine location)
; location type
; consider adjacent location (1: ac-

[1,30]=2
[1,30]=30

; location status (2: location free)


; location kind index
(16: Location no. 16)
;Locations in buffer magazine
;--------------------------------;spindle
$TC_MPP1 [9998,1]=2
; location kind (2: spindle)
$TC_MPP2 [9998,1]=0
; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9998,1]=0
; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9998,1]=2
; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9998,1]=1
; location kind index
(1: location No. 1)
;Locations on load magazine
;----------------------;1st load magazine
$TC_MPP1 [9999,1]=7
; location kind (7: load point)
$TC_MPP2 [9999,1]=0
; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9999,1]=0
; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9999,1]=2
; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9999,1]=1
; location kind index
(1: location No. 1)
;2nd loading station
$TC_MPP1 [9999,2]=7
; location kind (7: load point)
$TC_MPP2 [9999,2]=0
; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9999,2]=0
; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9999,2]=2
; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9999,2]=2
; location type index
(2: location No. 2)

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-131

9 Tool Management
9.4

12.01

Examples

;Distances between load points/buffer and real


;magazine
;----------------------------------------------------$TC_MDP2 [1,1]=0
$TC_MDP1 [1,1]=0
$TC_MDP1 [1,2]=0

; spindle
; 1st load point
; 2nd load point

M17

Create tool management blocks

9-132

Compile STL source TM_WO_GR.AWL (data transfer without dual gripper).


Then load the generated blocks FC100, FB110, DB110 in the PLC and call in
OB1 and OB100 (see Section 4.2 Example for OB1 and OB100).

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01

9.4

9.4.2

Examples

Example 2: Machine with chain magazine

Precondition

Set NC machine
data

Chain magazine with 30 locations: The tool change is carried out in the spindle
with gripper 1/2.

Table 9-4

NC machine data for ShopMill

NC MD
number
18086

Adapt the configuration file

Name
$MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION

Value
35

Adapt configuration file TM_W_GR.8X0 (configuration with dual gripper) at the


points marked in bold type and load into the NC.
%_N_TO_TMA_INI
CHANDATA (1)
;------------------;Magazine configuration
;------------------;Delete old data
;---------------$TC_MAP1 [0]=0
$TC_DP1 [0,0]=0
;Type of search strategy
;----------------$TC_MAMP2=257
; Search for active tools from
; 1st location onwards
;Magazine definition
;-------------;Real magazine
$TC_MAP1 [1]=1
$TC_MAP3 [1]=17
$TC_MAP6 [1]=1
$TC_MAP7 [1]=30
;Buffer magazine
$TC_MAP1 [9998]=7
$TC_MAP3 [9998]=17
$TC_MAP6 [9998]=1
$TC_MAP7 [9998]=3
;Load magazine
$TC_MAP1 [9999]=9
$TC_MAP3 [9999]=17
$TC_MAP6 [9999]=1
$TC_MAP7 [9999]=2

;
;
;
;
;

magazine kind (1: chain)


magazine status (17: active
magazine, enable for loading)
number of magazine tiers
number of magazine locations

; magazine kind (7: buffer)

; number of buffer locations


; (3: Spindle with dual gripper)
; magazine kind (9: load magazine)

; number of load points

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-133

9 Tool Management
9.4

12.01

Examples

;Locations in real magazine


;-----------------------------;Location No. 1
$TC_MPP1 [1,1]=1
tion)
$TC_MPP2 [1,1]=1
$TC_MPP3 [1,1]=1
tive)
$TC_MPP4 [1,1]=2
$TC_MPP5 [1,1]=1

; location kind (1: magazine loca; location type


; consider adjacent location (1: ac; location status (2: location free)
; location kind index
(1: location no. 1)

.
.
.
;Location No.30
$TC_MPP1 [1,30]=1

; location kind
(1: magazine location)
$TC_MPP2 [1,30]=1
; location type
$TC_MPP3 [1,30]=1
; consider adjacent location
(1: active)
$TC_MPP4 [1,30]=2
; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [1,30]=30
; location kind index
(50: Location No. 50)
;Locations in buffer magazine
;--------------------------------;spindle
$TC_MPP1 [9998,1]=2
; location kind (2: spindle)
$TC_MPP2 [9998,1]=0
; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9998,1]=0
; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9998,1]=2
; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9998,1]=1
; location kind index
(1: location No. 1)
;Gripper 1
$TC_MPP1 [9998,2]=3
; location kind (3: gripper)
$TC_MPP2 [9998,2]=0
; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9998,2]=0
; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9998,2]=2
; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9998,2]=1
; location kind index
(1: location No. 1)
;Gripper 2
$TC_MPP1 [9998,3]=3
; location kind (3: gripper)
$TC_MPP2 [9998,3]=0
; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9998,3]=0
; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9998,3]=2
; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9998,3]=2
; location type index
(2: location No. 2)
;Assignment of buffers to spindle
;------------------------------------$TC_MLSR [2,1]=0
; 1st gripper
$TC_MLSR [3,1]=0
; 2nd gripper
;Locations on load magazine
;----------------------;1st load magazine
$TC_MPP1 [9999,1]=7
; location kind (7: load point)
$TC_MPP2 [9999,1]=0
; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9999,1]=0
; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9999,1]=2
; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9999,1]=1
; location kind index
(1: location No. 1)

9-134

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01

9.4

;2nd loading station


$TC_MPP1 [9999,2]=7
$TC_MPP2 [9999,2]=0
$TC_MPP3 [9999,2]=0
$TC_MPP4 [9999,2]=2
$TC_MPP5 [9999,2]=2

Examples

; location kind (7: load point)


; location type
; consider adjacent location
; location status (2: location free)
; location type index
(2: location No. 2)

;Distances between load points/buffer and real


;magazine
;----------------------------------------------------$TC_MDP2
$TC_MDP2
$TC_MDP2
$TC_MDP1
$TC_MDP1

[1,1]=0
[1,2]=0
[1,3]=0
[1,1]=0
[1,2]=0

;
;
;
;
;

spindle
gripper 1
gripper 2
1st load point
2nd load point

M17

Create tool management blocks

Compile the STL source TM_W_GR.AWL (data transfer with dual gripper). Then
load the generated blocks FC100, FB110, DB110 in the PLC and call in OB1
and OB100 (see Section 4.2 Example for OB1 and OB100).

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-135

9 Tool Management
9.5

9.5

12.01

Configuring the operator interface

Configuring the operator interface

There are 2 ways in which you can modify the existing tool management operator interface:

S You can configure the parameters variably as a function of tool in the lists
provided.

S You can configure your own lists in addition to the standard lists.

9.5.1

To modify the standard lists

You can make the following changes in the standard lists:

S Change a particular column for all tools.


S Change a particular column for a particular tool.
S Define different columns for each tool.
You must store every change to the list default settings in configuration file
to_mill.ini.
An example of this is given on the application diskette for the PCU 20. You can
adapt this example and then install it with the ShopMill software.
For the PCU 50, you will find an example in directory ADD_ON after you have
installed ShopMill. You can also adapt this and then store it in directory OEM.
The configuration file will be evaluated only if you set bit 6 in MD 9478
$MM_TO_OPTION_MASK.

Note
You need only define settings which deviate from the default in the
configuration file.

In this regard, please note the following:

S You can define up to 13 columns after the DP number column.


S Define the edge parameters, i.e. length, radius and angle in successive
columns.

S Define either edge parameters or tool parameters, but not both, in one
column. (Tool parameters are all parameters which are not edge parameters.)

9-136

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.5

Syntax

Configuring the operator interface

The following syntax rules applies to entries in the configuration file (see also
example at end of this section):
First specify the tool management list in which you wish to make changes.
[SCREEN_ID]
SCREEN_ID: Tool management list
Next, define the changes themselves:

S Change a particular column for all tools:


COLUMNx=CONTENT_ID
COLUMN: Column command
x: Column number, max. 13
CONTENT_ID: Parameter or property of tool

S Change a particular column for a particular tool:


TOOL_ID= x=CONTENT_ID
TOOL_ID: Tool type

S Define different columns for each:


TOOL_ID = CONTENT_ID / CONTENT_ID / ...
TOOL_ID = CONTENT_ID / CONTENT_ID / ...
...
The parameters or properties of a tool are listed consecutively on the basis
of a CONTENT_ID and separated from one another by an oblique symbol
/. Even if you want to use the default setting for individual columns, you
must still enter the oblique symbol.
If, for example, you want to change only the last columns, enter the number
(x) of the first column that you wish to alter and then list the appropriate
CONTENT_ID for the following columns.
TOOL_ID = x = CONTENT_ID / CONTENT_ID / ..

Note
Using the COLUMN command, you can first define one column identically for
all tools and then adapt it specifically for individual tools.

You can identify comments by a semicolon (;) symbol.


If errors occur as the configuration file is being evaluated, you will find a description of the error in file to_ini_f.com in directory Temp.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-137

9 Tool Management
9.5

12.01

Configuring the operator interface

Identifiers

The SCREEN_, TOOL_ and CONTENT_IDs which are available for defining
columns are listed below.
Table 9-5

SCREEN_IDENTIFIER
SCREEN_IDENTIFIER

Tool management list

TOOL_LIST

Tool list

TOOL_LIST_2ND_EDGE

Tool list, 2nd edge

TOOL_WEAR

Tool wear list

TOOL_WEAR_2ND_EDGE

Tool wear list, 2nd edge

TOOL_MAGA

Magazine list

Table 9-6

TOOL_IDENTIFIER
TOOL_IDENTIFIER

Tool

SHANK_END_CUTTER

(End) mill

POINTED_DRILL

(Twist) drill

LOCATOR

Centering tool

3DTRACER

3D probe

EDGE_TRACER

Edge probe

3DCUTTER_110

Cylindrical die mill

3DCUTTER_111

Ball end mill

3DCUTTER_121

End mill with corner rounding

3DCUTTER_155

Bevel cutter

3DCUTTER_156

Bevel cutter with corner rounding

3DCUTTER_157

Tapered die mill

Table 9-7

CONTENT_ID

CONTENT_ID

9-138

Parameter or property

EMPTY

Empty field

NOT_USED

Empty column

LENGTH

Length

RADIUS

Radius

RADIUS_DIAM

Radius with possible diameter calculation

ANGLE

Angle

Number of teeth

SPINDLE

Spindle direction

COOL1

Cooling water 1

COOL2

Cooling water 2

MFCT1

Customized M function 1

MFCT2

Customized M function 2

MFCT3

Customized M function 3

MFCT4

Customized M function 4

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.5

Table 9-7

CONTENT_ID

CONTENT_ID

Example

Configuring the operator interface

Parameter or property

DLENGTH

Wear length

DRADIUS

Wear radius

DRADIUS_DIAM

Wear radius with possible diameter calculation

T_OR_C

Method of wear monitoring

P_TIME

Service life

P_COUNT

Quantity

T_LOCKED

Tool disabled

T_SIZE

Oversized tool

T_FIXED

Tool in fixed location

P_LOCKED

Magazine location disabled

MAG_T_LOCKED

Display only: Tool disabled

MAG_T_SIZE

Display only: Oversized tool

MAG_T_FIXED

Display only: Tool in fixed location

H_NBR

Fanuc H number

;Tool list
[TOOL_LIST]
;Column default settings
COLUMN1 = H_NBR
COLUMN2 = LENGTH
COLUMN3 = RADIUS_DIAM
COLUMN4 = EMPTY
COLUMN5 = EMPTY
COLUMN6 = SPINDLE
COLUMN7 = COOL1
COLUMN8 = COOL2
COLUMN9 = MFCT1
COLUMN10= MFCT2
COLUMN11= MFCT3
COLUMN12= MFCT4
;Deviations from default settings
SHANK_END_CUTTER = 5=N
POINTED_DRILL = 4=ANGLE
LOCATOR = 3=EMPTY / ANGLE
3DTRACER =
EDGE_TRACER =
3DCUTTER_110 = 5=N
3DCUTTER_111 = 5=N
3DCUTTER_121 = 5=N
3DCUTTER_155 = 5=N
3DCUTTER_156 = 5=N
3DCUTTER_157 = 5=N

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-139

9 Tool Management
9.5

9.5.2

12.01

Configuring the operator interface

Defining an additional list

You can define another list, configured by yourself, on the 3rd horizontal softkey
on the tool management operator interface. You can use the parameters from
the standard lists as well as 6 user-defined parameters in this customized list. (If
you use customized parameters in this extra list, you will also be able to use
them in the standard lists.)
You must activate the list by setting bit 2 of display MD 9478 $MM_TO_OPTION_MASK.
You must also set MD 18094 $MN_MM_NUM_CCTDA_PARAM to 8.

Note
Once you have set the two machine data above, you can call a sample list with
2 user-defined parameters by selecting the 3rd horizontal softkey on the tool
management user interface.

Define the list

Instructions on how to define the customized list can be found in Subsection


9.5.1 To modify the standard lists. All these instructions apply equally to customized lists.
The SCREEN_ID for the customized list is as follows:
Table 9-8

SCREEN_ID
SCREEN_ID

TOOL_LIST_OEM

Tool management list


Additional list

User-defined parameters have the following CONTENT_ID:


Table 9-9

CONTENT_ID
CONTENT_ID

Define texts

9-140

Parameter or property

TPC1

Parameter 1

TPC2

Parameter 2

TPC4

Parameter 4

TPC5

Parameter 5

TPC6

Parameter 6

TPC8

Parameter 8

You assign the texts (softkey name, customized list header, name and associated cursor text of user-defined parameters) in a text file using special text numbers.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9 Tool Management

12.01
9.5

Configuring the operator interface

The relevant syntax is:


[text number] 0 0 [text]
The two parameters 2 and 3 separated by blanks are control characters for text
output and must always be set to 0.
The parameter name can comprise 3 lines, each line with its own text number
(see Table 9-10).
Table 9-10

Text assignment
Text type

Text number

3rd horizontal softkey

89923

List header

89924

Name of parameter TPC1

89925, 89926, 89927

Cursor text of parameter TPC1

89930

Name of parameter TPC2

89930, 89931, 89932

Cursor text of parameter TPC2

89932

Name of parameter TPC4

89937, 89938, 89939

Cursor text of parameter TPC4

89949

Name of parameter TPC5

89940, 89941, 89942

Cursor text of parameter TPC5

89950

Name of parameter TPC6

89943, 89944, 89945

Cursor text of parameter TPC6

89951

Name of parameter TPC8

89946, 89947, 89948

Cursor text of parameter TPC8

89952

Example:
89924 0 0 Tool data
The maximum permissible number of characters for the different text types are
as follows:
Softkey: 9
Header: 20
Parameter: 7
Cursor text: 45
A line break in the softkey text can be made by inserting two consecutive
blanks.

Note
Some texts are already set to defaults which you can change.

PCU 20

For the PCU 20 enter the texts and numbers in text file aluc.txt. A aluc.txt text
file is stored in every language directory.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

9-141

9 Tool Management
9.5

12.01

Configuring the operator interface

PCU 50

For the PCU 50 enter the texts and numbers in text file
C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_xx.com. The file aluc_xx.com may have to be created in the
directory cus.dir.
The text language is assigned via the name of the text file. xx is replaced by
one of the following abbreviations in the text file name:
Table 9-11

Language assignment

Abbreviation
xx

Language

gr

German

uk

English

fr

French

it

Italian

sp

Spanish

nl

Dutch

fi

Finnish

sw

Swedish

pl

Polish

tr

Turkish

ch

Czech

tw

Taiwan Chinese

ko

Korean

hu

Hungarian

po

Portuguese

ru

Cyrillic

cz

Czech

yes

Japanese

Add the following line in section [TextFiles} of file C:\user\mbdde.ini:


UserZYK=C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_

9-142

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Measuring Cycles
10.1

10

Brief description

Overview

You can use measuring cycles for automatic measuring on vertical machining
centers and universal milling machines with ShopMill.
For this you need to connect a touch trigger probe to the control.

Measuring cycles

The measuring cycles are shipped with ShopMill and contained in the ShopMill
Toolbox.
You need to adapt the measuring cycle data to the actual conditions of the
machine and make an initial assignment.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

10-143

10 Measuring Cycles
10.2

10.2

12.01

Probe connection

Probe connection

Probe connection

A maximum of two sensors can be connected to the SINUMERIK 810D via the
X121 I/O interface, which is located on the front panel of the CCU module.

CCU1
Probe
X121

Fig. 10-1

10-144

Cable distributor

Probe connection to X121 on CCU module

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

10 Measuring Cycles

12.01

10.2

I/O interface (X121)

Probe connection

The probe is connected via a 37-pin D-Sub pin connector (X121).


The 24 V load power supply is also connected on this connector.
Table 10-1

Extract from PIN assignment table for X121 front connectors

PIN

Designation
External power supply
1

M24EXT

External ground

M24EXT

External ground

...

...

...
Connection probe 1

MEPUS 0

Measuring pulse signal input

10

MEPUC 0

Measuring pulse common input

...

...

20

P24EXT

Current 24 V external

21

P24EXT

Current 24 V external

...

...

...
External power supply

...
Connection probe 2

28

MEPUS 1

29

MEPUC 1

...

...

Measuring pulse signal input


Measuring pulse common input
...

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

10-145

10 Measuring Cycles
10.3

10.3

12.01

Functional check

Functional check

Measuring command The measuring cycles operate internally with the MEAS command.
References:

PLC service
display

/PGA/, Programming Guide

The functional test for the probe is conducted via an NC program.


The measuring signal can be controlled after the end of the program via the
diagnostics menu PLC status.
Table 10-2

Status display for measuring signal


Status display

-,...
DBX107.0 and 107.1
Data block
Edge evaluation: no
Signal state 1 or edge
change 0------>1
Signal state 0 or edge
change 1 ------> 0
References
Note

Example of
functional test

Probe 1 deflected

DB 10

DB B107.0

Probe 2 deflected

DB 10

DB B107.1

Probe activated
Signal(s) from axis/spindle (drive_PLC)
Signal(s) updated: cyclically
Probe 1 or 2 is activated.

Signal(s) valid as of SW: 1.1

Probe 1 or 2 is not activated.


/PHD/, NCU 571-573 Manual
/PHF/, NCU 570 Manual
The above mentioned signal states correspond to the default setting (non-deflected 0 V;
deflected 24 V). Otherwise, the measurement input No. must be entered as a negative
number.

%_N_PRUEF_MESSTASTER_MPF

;$PATH=/_N_MPF_DIR
;Testing program probe connection
N05

DEF INT MTSIGNAL

;Flag for
;actuation state

N10

DEF INT ME_NR=1

;Measuring input number

N20

DEF REAL MEASVAL_IN_X

N30

G17 T1 D1

;Preset tool offset for


;probe

N40

_ANF: G0 G90 X0 F150

;Start position and


;measuring velocity

N50 MEAS=ME_NR G1 X100


input 1

;Measurement at measuring
; in the X axis

10-146

N60

STOPRE

N70

MTSIGNAL=$AC_MEA[1]

;Reading switching signal


;implemented in SW

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

10 Measuring Cycles

12.01

10.3

Functional check

;software at 1st
measuring input
N80

IF MTSIGNAL == 0 GOTOF _FEHL1 ;Signal evaluation

N90

MESSWERT_IN_X=$AA_MW[X]

N95

M0

;Read measured value


;in workpiece coordinates

N100 M02
N110 _FEHL1: MSG (Probe not switching!)
N120 M0
N130 M02

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

10-147

10 Measuring Cycles
10.4

12.01

Start-up sequences

10.4

Start-up sequences

10.4.1

Start-up flowchart for probe activation

Start-up of
measuring cycles on
the control

Start

Connect the signal lead


of the probe to the I/O interface X121
or X1 (according to the control type)

Check measuring function


using
the PRUEF_MESSTASTER
testing program

no
Single block ?
yes

no
Override to zero ?
yes
Load and preselect
PRUEF_MESSTASTER
program

Fig. 10-2

10-148

Start-up flowchart -- Fig. 1

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

10 Measuring Cycles

12.01
10.4

Start-up sequences

NC START

no

Is a measuring block with


MEAS present ?
yes

Let NC block be
executed
Does the measuring
block disappear without
the probe being
deflected?

no

yes

There are pulses on the


measuring lead!
Cause:
Could be interference
Remedy:
Check probe connection
or measuring lead not
grounded

Override is zero,
Distance to go reached,
Activate probe manually

Measuring input 1: DB10 DB B107.0


Measuring input 2: DB10 DB B107.1

Fig. 10-3

Start-up flowchart -- Fig. 2

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

10-149

10 Measuring Cycles
10.4

12.01

Start-up sequences

no

no

Does the bit change


with probe deflection
from 0 to 1?
yes
Has the distance to go
been deleted and entered
in MEASVAL_IN_X?
yes

Contact service dept.


End

Fig. 10-4

10-150

Start-up flowchart -- Fig. 3

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

10 Measuring Cycles

12.01
10.5

Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence

10.5

Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence

10.5.1

Machine data for adapting the probe

Machine data for


adapting the probe
13200
MD number
Default setting: 0

MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE [0]
Switching performance of the probe at measuring input 1
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 1

Change valid after POWER ON


Data type: BOOLEAN
Meaning:

Value 0:

Value 1:

13200
MD number
Default setting: 0

MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE [1]
Switching performance of the probe at measuring input 2
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 1

Change valid after POWER ON


Data type: BOOLEAN
Meaning:

Protection level: 2/7


Unit: -Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
(default setting)
non-deflected state
0V
deflected state
24 V
non-deflected state
24 V
deflected state
0V

Value 0:

Value 1:

Protection level: 2/7


Unit: -Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
(default setting)
non-deflected state
0V
deflected state
24 V
non-deflected state
24 V
deflected state
0V

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

10-151

10 Measuring Cycles
10.5

10.5.2

Display machine data for measuring cycles

9750
MD number
Default setting: 0
Change applies from:
Data type: BOOL
Meaning:

9751
MD number
Default setting: 1
Change applies from:
Data type: BOOL
Meaning:

9752
MD number
Default setting: 5
Change applies from:
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

9753
MD number
Default setting: 10
Change applies from:
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

9754
MD number
Default setting: 2
Change applies from:
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

10-152

12.01

Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence

CMM_MEAS_PROBE_INPUT
Measuring input for a workpiece probe
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 1
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the measuring input for a workpiece probe.
0
= Measuring input 1 is activated
1
= Measuring input 2 is activated
CMM_MEAS_T_PROBE_INPUT
Measuring input for tool probe
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 1
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the measuring input for a tool probe.
0
= Measuring input 1 is activated
1
= Measuring input 2 is activated

CMM_MEASURING_DISTANCE
Maximum measurement path (before and after the measuring point) for automatic
measurement in the program.
Min. input limit: 0.01
Max. input limit: 1000
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm
Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the maximum measurement path for Tool measurement before and after
the expected switching position (workpiece edge) and applies for automatic programmed
measurements. If no switching signal is output within the area, the error message probe
does not switch is output.

CMM_MEAS_DIST_MAN
Maximum measurement path for manual measurement (before and after the measuring
point)
Min. input limit: 0.01
Max. input limit: 1000
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm
Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the maximum measurement path for Tool measurement for manual
mode before and after the expected switching position (workpiece edge). If no switching
signal is output within the area, the error message probe does not switch is output.

CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_LENGTH
Maximum measurement path for tool length (before and after measuring point)
Min. input limit: 0.001
Max. input limit: 1000
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm
Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the maximum measurement path for Tool measurement for measuring
the tool length of a rotating spindle before and after the expected switching position (tool
length). If no switching signal is output within the area, the error message probe does not
switch is output.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

10 Measuring Cycles

12.01
10.5

9755
MD number
Default setting: 1
Change applies from:
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

9756
MD number
Default setting: 300
Change applies from:
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

9757
MD number
Default setting: 1000
Change applies from:
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

9758
MD number
Default setting: 1000
Change applies from:
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

9759
MD number
Default setting: 100
Change applies from:
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence

CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_RADIUS
Maximum measurement path for tool radius (before and after measuring point)
Min. input limit: 0.001
Max. input limit: 1000
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm
Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the maximum measurement path for Tool measurement for measuring
the tool radius of a rotating spindle before and after the expected switching position (tool
radius). If no switching signal is output within the area, the error message probe does not
switch is output.

CMM_MEASURING_FEED
Measuring feed
Min. input limit: 10
Max. input limit: 5000
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm/min
Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defined the measuring feed for Tool measurement and for Tool measurement
with spindle at standstill.

CMM_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL
Feed in the plane with collision monitoring
Min. input limit: 10
Max. input limit: 5000
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm/min
Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
To protect the probe, intermediate positions are approached with this feed in the plane as
measuring blocks to monitor for collisions. This feed must be selected such that the
maximum deflection of the probe is not exceeded should a collision occur.

CMM_POS_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL
Infeed with collision monitoring
Min. input limit: 10
Max. input limit: 5000
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm/min
Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
To protect the probe, intermediate positions are approached with this feed in the tool axis
as measuring blocks to monitor for collisions. This feed must be selected such that the
maximum deflection of the probe is not exceeded should a collision occur.

CMM_MAX_CIRC_SPEED_ROT_SP
Maximum circumferential speed for tool measurement with rotating spindle
Min. input limit: 1
Max. input limit: 200
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: m/min
Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
For tool measurement with rotating spindle, this MD defines the maximum circumferential
speed of the tools to be measured. The permissible spindle speed for carrying out the tool
measurement is calculated according to the MD.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

10-153

10 Measuring Cycles
10.5

12.01

Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence

9760
MD number
Default setting: 1000
Change applies from:
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

9761
MD number
Default setting: 10
Change applies from:
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

9762
MD number
Default setting: 0.01
Change applies from:
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

9763
MD number
Default setting: 0
Change applies from:
Data type: WORD
Meaning:

CMM_MAX_SPIND_SPEED_ROT_SP
Maximum speed for tool measurement with rotating spindle
Min. input limit: 100
Max. input limit: 25000
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: rpm
Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
For tool measurement with rotating spindle, this MD defines the maximum permissible
speed of the tools to be measured.

CMM_MIN_FEED_ROT_SP
Minimum feed for tool measurement with rotating spindle
Min. input limit: 0.01
Max. input limit: 1000
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm/min
Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD describes the minimum feed for Measuring tool with rotating spindle. Tools
which have a very large radius and require high precision would otherwise have a very
small feed.

CMM_MEAS_TOL_ROT_SP
Measuring accuracy for tool measurements with rotating spindle
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 1
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm
Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the desired accuracy of measurement for Measuring a tool with rotating
spindle.

CMM_TOOL_PROBE_TYPE
Type of tool probe
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 999
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the type of tool probe.
Type
0
101
201
301

10-154

Probe system
Measuring cube
Measuring disk in XY (1st and 2nd geometry axis)
Measuring disk in ZX (3rd and 1st geometry axis)
Measuring disk in YZ (2nd and 3rd geometry axis)

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

10 Measuring Cycles

12.01
10.5

9764
MD number
Default setting: 133
Change applies from:
Data type: WORD
Meaning:

Sample application:

9765
MD number
Default setting: 0
Change applies from:
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

9766
MD number
Default setting: 0
Change applies from:
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

9767
MD number
Default setting: 0
Change applies from:
Data type: DOUBLE
Meaning:

Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence

CMM_TOOL_PROBE_ALLOW_AXIS
Permissible axis directions for tool probe (ZYX)
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 333
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the permissible axes and the axis directions in which measurements can
be taken at the tool probe.
The number to be specified is made up of ZYX. The following attributes can be specified
for each axis:
0
not possible
1
only in minus direction
2
only in plus direction
3
in both directions
Default setting 133 means
1st number: 1
Measuring in Z possible in both directions
2nd number: 3
Measuring in Y possible in both directions
3rd number: 3
Measuring in X possible in both directions

CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_LENGTH_MEA
Diameter of tool probe for length measurement
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 100000
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm
Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the active diameter or the active edge of the tool probe for measurement
of the tool length.

CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_RAD_MEAS
Diameter of tool probe for radius measurement
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 100000
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm
Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the effective diameter or the effective edge of the tool probe for the radius
measurement.

CMM_T_PROBE_DIST_RAD_MEAS
Infeed from top edge of tool probe for radius measurement
Min. input limit: 0
Max. input limit: 100000
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: mm
Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the distance between the top edge of the tool probe and the bottom edge
of the tool for the radius measurement.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

10-155

10 Measuring Cycles
10.5

12.01

Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence

9768
MD number
Default setting: --1
Change applies from:
Data type: BYTE
Meaning:

CMM_T_PROBE_APPROACH_DIR
Plane approach direction, tool at tool probe
Min. input limit: --2
Max. input limit: 2
IMMEDIATE
Protection level: 3/4
Unit: -Valid as of SW:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
This MD defines the direction of an approach in the plane which the tool takes to the tool
probe.
Value
--1
+1
--2
+2

Approach direction
1st plane axis in minus direction
1st plane axis in plus direction
2nd plane axis in minus direction
2nd plane axis in plus direction

10-156

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

11

Network Link
11.1

General description

Option

The Manage Network/Diskette Drive function is an option available under order number 6FC5 463-0FA03-0AA0.

Function

ShopMill can set up a network management function in the Program Manager


operating area. You can use it to display directories and files

S stored on a server,
S stored, for example, in an archive directory on the hard disk,
S imported via a diskette drive.
A maximum of 5 softkeys are provided for this purpose on the horizontal softkey
menu in the Program Manager operating area. Softkey NC (1st softkey) has a
pre-configured function and is used to display the directories and files on the
NC and the data management directory on the hard disk. The other 4 softkeys
can be configured freely via display machine data.
To install the network, please see
References:

/IAM/, IM2, Installation and Startup of HMI Embedded


IM4, Installation and Startup of HMI Advanced.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

11-157

11 Network Link
11.2

12.01

Linking Windows network drives to ShopMill

11.2

Linking Windows network drives to ShopMill

Setting up the network management

A total of 4 softkeys are provided on the horizontal softkey menu in the ShopMill
Program Manager operating area for configuring the network management
function. Softkeys 2 to 5 can be configured freely via display machine data.

Note
Note that the directories of servers can only be linked if they are available.

11.2.1

PCU 20
Proceed as follows to link the Windows network drives:

Define the drive


names

Enter the drive names for the 2nd to 5th softkeys of the horizontal softkey menu
in text file aluc.txt.
The relevant syntax is:
[text number] 0 0 [softkey text]
You must assign the softkey texts to the following text numbers:
Softkey 2:
89901
Softkey 3:
89902
Softkey 4:
89903
Softkey 5:
89904
The two parameters 2 and 3 separated by blanks are control characters for text
output and must always be set to 0.

Note
A line break in the softkey text can be made by inserting two consecutive
blanks. You can use up to 9 characters per line.

A aluc.txt text file is stored in every language directory.

Example

In the Program Manager of ShopMill, the 2nd horizontal softkey must be assigned the name NETZ1 in German.
The following entry must be made in text file aluc_txt:
89901 0 0 NETZ1

Enter the drive


paths

11-158

Enter the drive path of the relevant softkey in display MD 9676 to 9679.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

11 Network Link

12.01
11.2

Linking Windows network drives to ShopMill

The following display machine data are available:


Softkey 2: MD 9676 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1
Softkey3: MD 9677 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2
Softkey4: MD 9678 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3
Softkey5: MD 9679 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4
The display machine data are described in Section 6 Machine Data.

Example

The directory Workpieces_1 stored on server 1 must be displayed via the 2nd
horizontal softkey labeled NETZ1.
The following must then be entered in MD 9676: \\Server1\Workpieces_1.

11.2.2

PCU 50
Proceed as follows to link the Windows network drives:

Define the drive


names

Enter the drive names for the 2nd to 5th softkeys of the horizontal softkey menu
in text file C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_xx.com. The file aluc_xx.com must be created in
the directory cus.dir.
The relevant syntax is:
[text number] 0 0 [softkey text]
The softkeys are assigned to the following text numbers in the file
aluc_xx.com:
Softkey 2:
89901
Softkey 3:
89902
Softkey 4:
89903
Softkey 5:
89904
The two parameters 2 and 3 separated by blanks are control characters for text
output and must always be set to 0.

Note
A line break in the softkey text can be made by inserting two consecutive
blanks. You can use up to 9 characters per line.

The text language is assigned via the name of the text file. xx is replaced by
one of the following abbreviations in the text file name:
Table 11-1

Language assignment

Abbreviation
xx

Language

gr

German

uk

English

fr

French

it

Italian

sp

Spanish

nl

Dutch

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

11-159

11 Network Link
11.2

12.01

Linking Windows network drives to ShopMill

Table 11-1

Language assignment

Abbreviation
xx

Language

fi

Finnish

sw

Swedish

pl

Polish

tr

Turkish

ch

Czech

tw

Taiwan Chinese

ko

Korean

hu

Hungarian

po

Portuguese

ru

Cyrillic

cz

Czech

yes

Japanese

Add the following line in section [TextFiles} of file C:\user\mbdde.ini:


UserZYK=C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_

Example

In the Program Manager of ShopMill, the 2nd horizontal softkey must be assigned the name NETZ1 in German.
The following entry must be made in text file aluc_gr.com:
89901 0 0 NETZ1
In the file C:\user\mbdde.ini, you must add the following line to the section [TextFiles]:
UserZYK=C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_

Enter the drive


paths

Enter the drive path of the relevant softkey in display MD 9676 to 9679.
The following display machine data are available:
Softkey 2: MD 9676 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1
Softkey3: MD 9677 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2
Softkey4: MD 9678 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3
Softkey5: MD 9679 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4
The display machine data are described in Section 6 Machine Data.

Example

The directory Workpieces_1 stored on server 1 must be displayed via the 2nd
horizontal softkey labeled NETZ1.
The following must then be entered in MD 9676: \\Server1\Workpieces_1.

11-160

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Access Protection via Password and


Keyswitch
12.1

12

General

Access rights

User access to programs, data and functions is restricted on the basis of


8 hierarchical protection levels. These are divided into (see Table 12-1):

S 4 password levels for Siemens, machine manufacturers and end users and
S 4 keyswitch settings for end users
A multi-level safety system for controlling access rights is thus provided.
Table 12-1
Protection
level

Access protection

Type

User

Access to (examples)

Password

Siemens

All functions, programs and data

Password

Machine manufacturer:
Development

Defined functions, programs and data;


E.g.: Enter options

Password

Machine manufacturer:
Start-up engineer

Defined functions, programs and data;


E.g.: Most machine data settings

Password

End user:
Service

Assigned functions, programs and data;

Keyswitch
Setting 3

End user:
Programmer
Machine setter

Less than protection level 0 to 3;


As defined by machine manufacturer or
End user

Keyswitch
Setting 2

End user:
Qualified operator,
who is not a programmer

Less than protection level 0 to 3;


defined by end user

Keyswitch
Setting 1

End user:
Trained operator,
who is not a programmer

Example:
Selection of programs, input of tool wear data
and zero offsets

Keyswitch
Setting 0

End user:
Semi-skilled operator

Example:
No inputs or program selection
permitted, inputs via machine control panel only

Decreasing
access rights

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12-161

12 Access Protection via Password and Keyswitch


12.1 General

Access protection
system

12.01

S Protection level 0 offers the highest access authorization and protection


level 7 the lowest.

S If a particular access right is assigned to a protection level, then the same


right will be automatically available on all higher protection levels.

S By the same token, an access right for a particular protection level can only
be changed from a higher protection level.

S The access rights on protection levels 0 to 3 are set as Siemens defaults.


S Access authorization is set through scanning of the current keyswitch
position and a comparison of password entries. In this case, a password
entry overwrites the access rights associated with the keyswitch position.

S Options can be saved on all protection levels, but option data can only be
input on protection levels 0 and 1.

S The access rights for protection levels 4 to 7 are merely suggested settings
and can be altered by the machine manufacturer or end user.

12-162

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12 Access Protection via Password and Keyswitch


12.2 Password

12.01

12.2

Password

Set password

The passwords for the 4 available password levels with their respective
access authorization can be entered in the DIAGNOSIS operating area through
selection of softkey SET PASSWORD.
References:
/BA/, Operators Guide

Reset
password

Please note that a password remains valid until the access authorization
is intentionally reset again by means of softkey DELETE PASSWORD.
In other words, the access authorization is not automatically deleted by a
POWER ON!

Permitted
characters

Up to 8 characters can be used in the password. We recommend that you


restrict yourself to the character set of the operator panel in selecting a password. In passwords with less than 8 characters, the remaining characters are
interpreted as blanks.

Default passwords

The following default passwords are defined for protection levels 1 to 3:


Protection level 1
SUNRISE
Protection level 2
EVENING
Protection level 3
CUSTOMER

Note
These passwords are entered as the defaults on system power-up in start-up
mode (NCK start-up switch in position 1).
The default passwords should be changed in order to guarantee reliable access
protection.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12-163

12 Access Protection via Password and Keyswitch


12.3 Keyswitch positions (DB10, DBX56.4 to 7)

12.3

12.01

Keyswitch positions (DB10, DBX56.4 to 7)

Keyswitch

The keyswitch on the SINUMERIK 840D/810D or SINUMERIK FM-NC has


4 positions to which protection levels 4 to 7 are assigned. The keyswitch is operated by 3 colored keys that can be removed from the lock in different positions
(see Table 12-2). Functions can be assigned to the key positions by the machine manufacturer or end user. Access to programs, data and functions can be
set user-specifically in machine data (see Section 12.4 Machine data for protection levels).
The keyswitch positions are transferred to the PLC interface (interface signals
Keyswitch positions 0 to 3 (DB10, DBX56.4 to 7)) for evaluation by the PLC
user program.
Keyswitch position 0 has access rights of the lowest priority and position 3 access rights of the highest priority. For example, all data which can be changed in
positions 0, 1 or 2, can also be changed in keyswitch position 3.

Application of
keyswitch

The keyswitch can be used to inhibit access to certain data areas. This protective function can be used, for example, to prevent the operator from making unintentional changes to geometry data (e.g. zero offsets) or activating program
controls (e.g. selection of dry run feedrate).
Table 12-2

Keyswitch positions 0 to 3

Switch position

Position 0

Control of PLC
user program

12-164

Key removal position DB10, DBB 56

--

Protection level

Bit 4

Position 1

0 or 1
Black key

Bit 5

Position 2

0 or 1 or 2
Green key

Bit 6

Position 3

0 or 1 or 2
or 3
Red key

Bit 7

The PLC interface signals (Keyswitch positions 0 to 3) can be input either


directly via the keyswitch on the machine control panel or by the PLC user program. Only one interface signal may be set at a time. If several interface signals
are set simultaneously, keyswitch position 3 is activated internally in the control.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12 Access Protection via Password and Keyswitch


12.4 Machine data for protection levels

12.01

12.4

Machine data for protection levels

Lockable
data areas

The machine manufacturer or end user can set MMC machine data to assign
the appropriate protection levels to individual functions and data areas. For a
number of data types, it is possible to input different protection levels for read
and write access authority.
The machine data which can be locked by means of protection levels in
ShopMill are listed below:
Operator panel machine data

Access to

9182 USER_CLASS_INCH_METRIC

Inch/metric switchover

9200 USER_CLASS_READ_TOA

Read tool offsets

9201 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_GEO

Write tool geometry


(including type and tool edge)

9202 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_WEAR

Write tool wear (without


limit value)

9210 USER_CLASS_WRITE_ZOA

Write settable zero


offsets

9215 USER_CLASS_WRITE_SEA

Write setting data

9217 USER_CLASS_WRITE_PROGRAM

Write/edit part programs

9218 USER_CLASS_SELECT_PROGRAM

Enable program selection

9222 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA

Write R parameters

9252 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLLOAD

Enable tool load

9253 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLUNLOAD Enable tool unload

Default setting

9258 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCNEWTOOL

Enable create a new tool

9259 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCDELTOOL

Enable delete a tool

These machine data are assigned protection level 7 per default during the standard start-up procedure. All these data areas and functions can thus be
accessed and altered in keyswitch position 0.
The protection level defaults may need to be changed by the machine manufacturer or end user. They can also be set to protection levels 0 to 3.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12-165

12 Access Protection via Password and Keyswitch


12.4 Machine data for protection levels

12.01

Notes

12-166

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

Miscellaneous
13.1

Configuring the customer booting display

13.1.1

PCU 20

13

You can create your own customer display (company logo, etc.) which will be
displayed when the control system is being booted.
Please proceed as follows to configure the customer boot screen:
1. Create your own boot screen in 16-color mode. The maximum screen size is
224x224 pixels for the OP010/OP010C/OP010S and 352x352 pixels for the
OP015.
2. Save the boot screen in bitmap format under the name
CUSTOM.BMP.
3. Start the file app_inst.exe (see Subsection 2.2.1 Starting up ShopMill on a
PCU 20).
4. Select <2> Modify configuration.
5. Select <6> Add user specific files to the application.
6. Enter the path of file CUSTOM.BMP.
Your customized boot screen is added to the application software.
7. Return to the main menu with Esc.
8. Finish installing the software on the PC card (see Subsection 2.2.1 Starting
up ShopMill on a PCU 20).
9. Load the PC card to the PCU 20 (see Subsection 2.2.1 Starting up ShopMill
on a PCU 20).
10. Set MD 9675 $MM_CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE to the value 1.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

13-167

13 Miscellaneous
13.1 Configuring the customer booting display

13.1.2

12.01

PCU 50

You can create your own customer display (company logo, etc.) which will be
displayed when the control system is being booted.
Please proceed as follows to configure the customer power-up display:
1. Create your own boot screen in 16-color mode. The maximum screen size is
224x224 pixels or the OP010/OP010C/OP010S and 352x352 pixels or the
OP015.
2. Save the boot screen in bitmap format under the name CUSTOM.BMP.
3. Copy the file CUSTOM.BMP to the directory C:\MMC0W32\BIN.
4. Set MD 9675 $MM_CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE to the value 1.

13-168

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

13 Miscellaneous
13.2 Configuring the user screenform

12.01

13.2

Configuring the user screenform

Using the Expand the Operator Interface tools, you can create your own user
forms representing specific functional expansions (e.g. your own cycles and
measuring cycles) or simply create your own screen form layout.
References:

/IAM/, HMI Installation and Start-Up Guide, BE1 Expand the


Operator Interface

Cycles generated using the Expand the Operator Interface function can be
displayed and edited in the machining plan, but not represented as a programming graphic.

Access softkeys

You can call your own screen forms by means of the following access softkeys:
Machine Manual basic display:
Horizontal softkey 8
Machine Auto basic display:
Horizontal softkey 6
Messages/alarms basic display:
Horizontal softkeys 7 and 8
Tools/zero offsets basic display:
Horizontal softkey 7

Note
If you assign one of your own cycles to horizontal softkey 8 in the Machine
Manual basic display, the generated NC code is collected and you can then
start the cycle with Cycle Start.

You can call your own cycles by means of the following access softkeys:
Program basic display:
Drilling:
Vertical softkey 6
Milling:
Vertical softkey 6
Miscellaneous:
Vertical softkey 4
When you program a cycle, it is subsequently transferred to the ShopMill program.
You can use the following entry softkeys to reveal your own measuring cycles,
which are to replace the ShopMill measuring cycles:
Basic display manual:
Zero point workpiece: Vertical softkeys 1 to 7
Measure tool:
Vertical softkeys 1 to 7
Program basic display: Miscellaneous:
Zero point workpiece: Vertical softkeys 1 to 7
Measure tool:
Vertical softkeys 1 to 7

Screen form
position

If you wish to display your user screen forms/cycles instead of the machining
plan or programming graphic, you must enter the following for screen form property Dimension:
Distance from left: 33
Distance from top: 52
Width: 525
Height: 378
//M(XYZ///33,50,523,380)

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

13-169

13 Miscellaneous
13.2 Configuring the user screenform

13.2.1

12.01

Linking user-configured cycles into the machining plan

If you wish to link user-configured cycles to existing program steps in the machining plan, it is essential that you configure the variables described below.
You must first define three variables which are not assigned until the program
step is inserted in the machining plan, i.e. the attribute must be assigned invisibly (wr0) to the input field of each variable. The variable sequence is as follows:
1. Variable for the next tool, data type String (S)
2. Variable for the position identifier in objects, data type Integer
3. Variable for the sequencer text to be displayed later in the ShopMill machining plan, data type String (S).
A value is best assigned to this variable in a LOAD method.
Two variables for cycles processing must also be defined as well as one variable for each toggle field which has a different display content on the interface
(e.g. mm/rev) than the internally transferred quantity (e.g. 1).
These variables do not have their own input field, i.e. the attribute must also be
assigned invisibly (wr0). The placement of the variables is optional.

Note
When an OUTPUT method is used, all variables described above must be
configured within this method so that they can all be interpreted on
recompilation.

Example

13-170

The toolbox contains a sample cycle named E_DR_O1.SPF. The associated


operator interface is configured in file E_DR_O1.COM. The German and
English texts are stored in files E_DR_TXD.COM and E_DR_TXE.COM respectively.
For information about installing the cycle, please refer to file readme.txt.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12.01
13.2

13.2.2

13 Miscellaneous
Configuring the user screenform

Incorporating own measuring cycles

When configuring your own measuring cycles, the vertical softkey 8 (VSK8) is
assigned a special meaning in the new cycles mask. All actions that the new
measuring cycle are to perform when the NC Start key is pressed must be
defined in a PRESS method for VSK8. If the NC Start key is pressed, NC code
is generated, and written to a program where it is processed; i.e. the function
Generate Code (GC) must be programmed in the PRESS method for VSK8 if
necessary. This, in turn means that an OUTPUT method must be defined.

Note
The VSK8 must not be pressed by the operator but is triggered internally when
the NC Start key is pressed. It should therefore not be labeled.

Example

The toolbox contains a sample measuring cycle named E_DR_O1.SPF. The


associated operator interface is configured in file E_DR_O1.COM. The German
and English texts are stored in files E_MS_TXD.COM and E_MS_TXE.COM
respectively.
For information about installing the cycle, please refer to file readme.txt.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

13-171

13 Miscellaneous
13.3 Cylinder surface transformation

12.01

13.3

Cylinder surface transformation

13.3.1

Function

Option

The cylinder surface transformation function can be used only if Tracyl (optional) has been set as a standard function.
The Order No. is: 6FC5 251-0AB01-0AA0.

General

The cylinder surface transformation is required in order to machine the following


on cylindrical bodies:

S Longitudinal grooves
S Transverse grooves
S Any type of groove contour.
The groove contour is programmed in relation to the developed, plane surface
of the cylinder. The program can include line/circle, drilling or milling cycles or
profiling (free contour programming).
There are two variants of cylinder surface transformation, i.e.

S with groove wall offset (ON)


S without groove wall offset (OFF).

Longitudinal groove

Transverse groove

without groove wall offset

Fig. 13-1

Longitudinal groove with parallel


limitation and groove wall offset

Grooves with and without groove wall offset

The cylinder surface transformation function is selected and deselected via softkey Miscellaneous, Transformations, Cylinder surface on the ShopMill interface and described in:
References:

13-172

/BAS/, ShopMill Operation/Programming ShopMill.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12.01
13.3

13.3.2

Example

13 Miscellaneous
Cylinder surface transformation

Example of how to set an axis configuration

The following example illustrates how to set the axis configuration on a machine.

A
Y

Key:
X
Y
Z
A
C

Fig. 13-2

Axis is parallel to rotary axis


Supplementary axis
Infeed axis perpendicular to rotary axis
Rotary axis
Workspindle

Groove machining on cylinder surface with X-C-Z kinematics

You must configure 2 data blocks with the following machine data for the machine illustrated above:
20070
20080
20080
20080
20080
20080

$MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[4]=5
Number of channel axes
$MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[0]=XC
Channel axis XC
$MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[1]=YC
Channel axis YC
$MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[2]=ZC
Channel axis ZC
$MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[3]=A
Channel axis A
$MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[4]=C
Channel axis C

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

13-173

13 Miscellaneous
13.3 Cylinder surface transformation

12.01

1st data block for cylinder surface transformation:


24100
$MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1=512
Definition of 1st transformation in cylinder surface channel
24110
$MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[0]=3
Channel axis of radial rotary axis (Z) for 1st transformation
24110
$MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[1]=4
Channel axis of rotary axis for 1st transformation
24110
$MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[2]=1
Channel axis of parallel rotary axis (X) for 1st transformation
24110
$MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[3]=2
Channel axis of special axis index [0] for 1st transformation
24120
$MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[0]=1
1st Channel axis (X) for 1st transformation
24120
$MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[1]=4
2nd Channel axis (Y) for 1st transformation
24120
$MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[2]=3
3rd Channel axis (Z) for 1st transformation
24800
$MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1=0
Offset of rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation
24810
$MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1=1
Sign of rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation
24820
$MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1[n]=0
Vector of basic tool for 1st TRACYL transformation
2nd data block for cylinder surface transformation with slot side correction:
24200
$MC_TRAFO_TYPE_2=513
Definition of 2nd transformation in cylinder surface channel with
slot side correction
24210
$MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[0]=3
Channel axis of radial rotary axis (Z) for 2nd transformation
24210
$MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[1]=4
Channel axis of rotary axis for 2nd transformation
24210
$MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[2]=1
Channel axis of parallel rotary axis (X) for 2nd transformation
24210
$MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[3]=2
Channel axis of special axis index [0] for 2nd transformation
24220
$MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2[0]=1
1st Channel axis (X) for 2nd transformation
24220
$MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2[1]=4
2nd channel axis (Y) for 2nd transformation
24220
$MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2[2]=3
3rd channel axis (Z) for 2nd transformation
24850
$MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2=0
Offset of rotary axis for 2nd TRACYL transformation
24860
$MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2=1
Sign of rotary axis for the 2nd TRACYL transformation
24870
$MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL[n]=0
Vector of basic tool for 2nd TRACYL transformation

Note
MD 24100 must always be set to 512 in the 1st data set and MD 24200 to 513
in the 2nd data set.

13-174

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12.01
13.3

Enable cylinder
surface transformation

13 Miscellaneous
Cylinder surface transformation

The Enable cylinder surface transformation function is displayed on the ShopMill operator interface when display MD 9721 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TRACYL
is set to 1. The rotary axis involved in the cylinder surface transformation is displayed and programmed via display MD 9653 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_A_AXIS or
9720 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_B_AXIS.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

13-175

13 Miscellaneous
13.4 Swivel heads and tables

13.4

12.01

Swivel heads and tables

Swivel heads and tables are employed to create or machine oblique surfaces.
Display MD 9723 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_SWIVELLING_HEAD is set to enable
the swiveling function.
You must set up a swivel data set for every swivel head, swivel table or combination of both.
You can define swivel data sets using softkey Swivel cycle in the Start-up
operating area on the CNC-ISO operator interface. For further details, see:
References: /PGZ/, Programming Guide Cycles.

Alarms

When the swivel head/table is set manually, alarms displaying the required angle are output:
62180
Set both axes manually
62181
Set one axis manually
With a Hirth tooth system, the corresponding rotary axes can only assume certain positions (angle grid > 0). If the programming demands a position that deviates from the angle grid, the machine automatically sets the next closest position and outputs an alarm.
112328
Angle adjusted to angle grid
How the alarm must be acknowledged can be set in swivel cycle TOOLCARR.
An alarm is output if the swivel head/table must be set to an angle outside the
permissible angular range in order to machine the workpiece:
61184
Machining not possible with current angle values
The programmed machining operation cannot be performed with the existing
swivel head/table.
ShopMill generates one of the following alarms when you manually load/unload
or replace swivel heads:
112323
Unload swivel head
112324
Load swivel head
112325
Replace swivel head
When swivel heads are loaded/unloaded or replaced, the swivel head cycle
TOOLCARR is also called.

13-176

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12.01
13.4

Swivel cycle

13 Miscellaneous
Swivel heads and tables

Swivel cycle TOOLCARR.SPF is stored in the toolbox and must be adapted to


meet special machine requirements:

S PLC enable to open the safety door


S Confirm that swivel head or table has been changed
S Angular setting of the swivel head/table
S Angular setting of the swivel head prior to tool change
S Angular setting of the swivel head prior to swivel head change
S Actions involved in adapting swivel plane due to Hirth tooth system
S Swivel angle on start of program
Note
One of the functions of cycle E_SWIV_H in swivel cycle TOOLCARR is to set
the angle of the swivel head prior to a tool change.
The following parameters must be transferred:
Swivel head number (stored in variable _TC1)
Angle of 1st swivel axis
Angle of 2nd swivel axis.
Cycle E_SWIV_H must not be used in modes _M20 and _M31.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

13-177

13 Miscellaneous
13.5 Multiple clamping

13.5

12.01

Multiple clamping

The Multiple clamping function optimizes tool changes over several workpiece
clampings. On the one hand, this reduces downtimes and, on the other, eliminates tool change times because a tool performs as many machining operations
as possible in all clampings before the next tool change is initiated.
You can either execute the same program several times in the clampings or you
can select different programs.
The Multiple clamping with different programs is a software option with Order
No. 6FC5 463-0FA04-0AA0.
The Multiple clamping function utilizes cycle CLAMP.SPF which is automatically loaded when ShopMill is installed.
You can leave the cycle unchanged for flat clamping devices. In the case of
rotating clamping devices, you must adapt the cycle to match the features of the
machine so as to ensure that the next workpiece can be turned to the correct
position while the current workpiece is being machined.
You can find the required cycle in tools\cycles\d in the toolbox.

13-178

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

13 Miscellaneous
13.6 ISO dialects

12.01

13.6

ISO dialects

You can import, process and export ISO Dialect0-M programs (Fanuc0 milling).
Please read the following description for further details:
References:
/FBFA/, Description of Functions ISO Dialects.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

13-179

13 Miscellaneous
13.7 Spindle control

13.7

12.01

Spindle control

The ShopMill spindle control has the following special features:

S MD 35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET, value 1 causes the NCK


not to switched off the spindle at M2 or M30. In contrast, the ShopMill PLC
distinguishes between M2 and M30. The spindle is stopped in response to
M30 or RESET, but not M2.
One of the benefits of this functionality is that the spindle can be started at
any time in manual mode (e.g. for scratching).

S The keys Spindle right, Spindle left and Spindle stop triggers the ShopMill -PLC input signals DB82 DBX9.1 spindle_start, DB82 DBX9.4 spindle_right, DB82 DBX9.3 spindle_left and DB82 DBX9.2 spindle_stop.
The ShopMill PLC program writes the following interface signals to the
signal data block:
DB3x.DBX30.0 Spindle Stop
DB3x.DBX30.1 Spindle Start CW Rotation
DB3x.DBX30.2 Spindle Start CCW Rotation
The spindle can be started and stopped when the channel is in the Reset
state (DB21.DBX35.7=1) or when the channel status is interrupted
(DB21.DBX35.6=1) and the program status is interrupted
(DB21.DBX35.3=1).

Note
If the spindle must be stopped when the program is running, then interface
signal Feed Stop/Spindle Stop must be set in the user PLC (DB3x.DBX4.3).

The spindle control can be deactivated via interface signal DB82.DBX9.0.

13-180

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

12.01
13.8

13.8

13 Miscellaneous
Automatically generated programs

Automatically generated programs

ShopMill creates several programs automatically during operation.

CMM_SINGLE

The program is created when a function is executed in the Machine manual


operating area. The ShopMill PLC switches internally to the Machine Auto
area, processes the CMM_SINGLE program and returns to the Machine
Manual operating area.

CMM_MDI

The G code records programmed under MDI are saved in this program.

INPUT_DATA_MM
INPUT_DATA_IN

The parameter values last entered in a mask are saved in this program, independent of the unit of measurement. (INPUT_DATA_MM = values with the unit
mm; INPUT_DATA_IN = values with the unit Inch)

REM_DATA

The data to be retained after the machine is switched off are stored in this program.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) -- 12.01 Edition

13-181

13 Miscellaneous
13.9 ShopMill Open (PCU 50)

13.9

12.01

ShopMill Open (PCU 50)

The difference between ShopMill Open and ShopMill Classic is that the Open
variant has a basic menu bar or extended basic menu bar. It is not possible to
change to the CNC ISO operator interface in ShopMill Open, but the HMI
Advanced operating areas Parameters (without tool management and zero
offsets), Services, Diagnosis and Start-Up are directly accessible via the
extended horizontal softkey menu.
Furthermore, you can integrate Windows applications via softkeys in the basic
menu bar in ShopMill Open.
You must install these Windows applications in the OEM directory and define
them in file Regie.ini. For further details, see on the ShopMill CD-ROM:
References:

13.9.1

Users Manual HMI Programming Package Part 1 (BN).

Basic menu bar

Jump into application

There are various methods by which you can integrate Windows applications
into the basic menu bar:

S Horizontal softkey 4, i.e. the Messages/Alarms operating area is replaced


S User-assignable softkeys 7 and 8
S User-assignable softkeys 1 to 8 in the extended horizontal softkey menu
Return jump from
application

There are 3 methods by which you can jump from the Windows application to
another operating area:

S Using the Menu Select key on the operator panel, you can return to the
basic menu bar and then select another operating area via a softkey.

S You can configure the keys Position, Program, Offset, Program Manager, Alarm and Custom on the operator panel to branch directly into another operating area or sub-menu.

S You can configure so-called PLC keys to branch into another operating
area or sub-menu.
References:

13-182

/IAM/, Installation & Start-Up Guide HMI, Expand the Operator


Interface (BE1)
Keywords OP Hotkeys and PLC Keys

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

12.01

13.10

13 Miscellaneous
13.10 Cycles/measuring cycles support in the G code editor

Cycles/measuring cycles support in the G code editor

You can integrate screenforms in the G code editor which will offer you assistance in programming drilling, milling, turning and measuring cycles. These cycles
can then be recompiled automatically.
You must create a link between the softkeys which call this cycles/measuring
cycles support function and the configuring file of the support screens in file
COMMON.COM (in the user cycles directory CUS.DIR):
sc8493=aeditor.com
sc8494=aeditor.com
sc8495=aeditor.com
sc8402=aeditor.com
sc8403=aeditor.com

; Drilling (horizontal softkey 3)


; Milling (horizontal softkey 4)
; Turning (horizontal softkey 5)
; Measuring of milling (horizontal softkey 2
; on the extended softkey bar)
; Measuring of turning (horizontal softkey 3
; on the extended softkey bar)

For further information, please see:


References:

/IAM/, Installation & Start-up Guide HMI,


BE1 Expand the Operator Interface.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

13-183

13 Miscellaneous
13.11 User status display (PCU 50)

13.11

12.01

User status display (PCU 50)

Machine states controlled via the PLC can be displayed as user symbols in the
program status line.

Program status line

Fig. 13-3

Program status line

You must activate display of these user symbols in display MD 9052


SHOW_CHANNEL_SPANNING_STATE.
The program path of the currently selected program is then displayed with the
program name in the line below.
16 display positions are defined in the program status line.

User
symbols

User symbols must meet the following requirements:

S Colors: 16-color mode


S Size:

OP010/OP010C/OP010S: 16 x 16 pixels
OP015: 27 x 26 pixels (height x width)

S File name: 8 characters


S Format: BMP
Add the user symbols for the OP010/OP010C/OP010S to archive file
ICO_640.arj in directory C:\MMC0W32\BIN or, for the OP015, to archive file
ICO_1024.arj.

HEADER.INI

Enter the names of the user symbols in file C:\MMC0W32\BIN\HEADER.INI at


identifiers UserIcons.
[UserIcons]
UI_0= <Ikone_00.bmp>, <Position>
UI_0:
Identifier
Ikone_00.bmp: Name of user symbol
Position:
Display position (1 to 16)
...
UI_31= <Ikone_31.bmp>, <Position>
USER_ICON_BASE = DBx.DBBy
DBx.DBBy:

13-184

User-defined signal for control of


symbol selection

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

12.01

13 Miscellaneous
13.11 User status display (PCU 50)

User symbols are addressed bit-serially, i.e. if bit n is set in signal DBx.DBBy,
the user symbol is displayed with identifier UI_n.
If the bit is reset by the PLC, the associated user symbol is deleted from the
program status display.
If several user symbols are assigned to the same position, the user symbol with
the highest identifier number is displayed.
Empty positions need not be specified.

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

13-185

13 Miscellaneous
13.12 OP hotkeys, PLC keys

13.12

12.01

OP hotkeys, PLC keys

OP hotkeys

You can configure the keys Position, Program, Offset, Program Manager,
Alarm and Custom on the operator panel to branch to an operating area of
your choice.

PLC keys

You can configure so-called PLC keys to branch to particular operating areas.

For information about configuring, please see:


References:
/IAM/, Installation & Start-Up Guide HMI, Expand the
Operator Interface (BE1)
Keywords OP hotkeys and PLC keys.

13-186

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

Abbreviations
ASUB

Asynchronous SUBprogram

BP

Basic Program

CCU

Compact Control Unit

COM

Communication

CNC

Computer Numerical Control

CPU

Central Processing Unit

DB

Data Block

DBB

Data Block Byte

DBX

Data Block bit

DRAM

Dynamic Random Access Memory

FB

Function Block

FC

Function Call on the PLC

GP

Basic program

GUD

Global User Data

HPU

Handheld Programming Unit

HSK

Horizontal Softkey

INC

INCrement: incremental dimension

IS

Interface Signal

ISA

Industry Standard Architecture

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

A-187

A Abbreviations

12.01

MCP

Machine Control Panel

MD

Machine Data

MMC

Man Machine Communication:

MPF

Main Program File: NC part program (main program)

MPI

Multipoint Interface

NC

Numerical Control

NCK

Numerical Control Kernel (kernel with block preparation, traversing range, etc.)

NCU

Numerical Control Unit: NC module

OB

Organization Block on the PLC

PC

Personal Computer

PCMCIA

Personal Computer Memory Card International Association

PG

Programming unit

PLC

Programmable Logic Controller

RAM

Random Access Memory in which data can be read and written

RS-232

Serial interface
(definition of interchange circuit between DTE and DCE)

SD

Setting Data

SK

Soft Key

SPF

SubProgram File

SRAM

Static Random Access Memory (buffered)

Tool

TC

Tool Change

A-188

User interface of SINUMERIK systems for


operator control, programming and simulation

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

A Abbreviations

12.01

TO

Tool Offset

TOOLMAN

Tool Management

WO

Work Offset

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

A-189

A Abbreviations

12.01

Notes

A-190

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

References

General Documentation
/BU/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/802S, C, D
Ordering information
Catalog NC 60
Order No.: E86060-K4460-A101-A9-7600

/ST7/

SIMATIC
SIMATIC S7 Programmable Logic Control
Catalog ST 70
Order No.: E86 060-K4670-A111-A3

/Z/

SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE


Cables & Connections & System Components
Catalog NC Z
Order No.: E86060-K4490-A001-A8-7600

Electronic Documentation
/CD8/

The SINUMERIK System


(01.02 Edition)
DOC ON CD
(with all the SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/802 and SIMODRIVE publications)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6CA00-0BG2

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

B-191

B References

12.01

User Documentation
/AUK/

/AUP/

/BA/

/BAD/

/BEM/

/BAE/

/BAH/

/BAK/

/BAM/

/BAS/

B-192

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
AutoTurn Operator Action Short Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA30-0BP3

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
AutoTurn Graphic Programming System
Programming/setup
Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA40-0BP3

(11.01 Edition)

(11.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
MMC Operators Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA00-0BP0

(10.00 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
HMI Advanced Operators Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AF00-0BP1

(11.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
HMI Embedded Operators Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AC00-0BP1

(11.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Unit Operator Panel Operators Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-3AA60-0BP1

(04.96 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
HT 6 Operators Guide (HPU New)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-0AD60-0BP2

(11.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Operator Action Short Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA10-0BP0

(02.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
ManualTurn Operators Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD00-0BP1

(08.00 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
ShopMill Operators Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AD10-0BP0

(10.01 Edition)

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

B References

12.01

/BAP/

/BAT/

/BNM/

/DA/

/KAM/

/KAS/

/KAT/

/PG/

/PGA/

/PGK/

/PGM/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Handheld Programming Unit Operators Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD20-0BP1

(04.00 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
ShopTurn Operators Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP0

(03.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Measuring Cycles Users Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA70-0BP1

(09.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Diagnostics Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA20-0BP1

(09.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
ManualTurn Short Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD40-0BP0

(04.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
ShopMill Short Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD30-0BP0

(04.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
ShopTurn Short Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AF20-0BP0

(07.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Fundamentals Programming Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB00-0BP1

(09.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Job Planning Programming Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB10-0BP1

(09.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Programming Short Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB30-0BP1

(02.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Programming Guide ISO Milling
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AC20-0BP1

(10.01 Edition)

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

B-193

B References

/PGT/

/PGZ/

12.01

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Programming Guide ISO Turning
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AC10-0BP1

(10.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Cycles Programming Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB40-0BP1

(09.01 Edition)

/PI /

PCIN 4.4
Software for data transfer to and from the MMC module
Order No.: 6FX2 060 4AA00-4XB0 (Ger., Eng., Fr.)
Order from: Frth plant

/SYI/

SINUMERIK 840Di
System Overview
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AE40-0BP0

(02.01 Edition)

Manufacturer/Service Documentation
a) Lists

/LIS/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
SIMODRIVE 611D
Reports
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AB70-0BP1

(09.01 Edition)

b) Hardware

/BH/

/BHA/

/EMV/

B-194

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Operator Component Manual (hardware)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP1

SIMODRIVE Sensor
Absolute Encoder with Profibus-DP
Users Guide (hardware)
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB10-0YP1

SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE


EMC Installation Guideline
Planning Guide (hardware)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-0AD30-0BP1

(09.01 Edition)

(02.99 Edition)

(06.99 Edition)

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

B References

12.01

/PHC/

SINUMERIK 810D
Configuration Manual (hardware)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-4AD10-0BP1

(10.01 Edition)

/PHD/

SINUMERIK 840D
Configuration Manual NCU 561.2-573.2 (hardware) (09.01 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC10-0BP1

/PHF/

SINUMERIK FM-NC
Configuration Manual NCU 570 (hardware)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AC00-0BP0

/PMH/

(04.96 Edition)

SIMODRIVE Sensor
Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives
Configuration/Installation Guide, SIMAG-H (hardware)
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB30-0BP0

(05.99 Edition)

c) Software

/FB1/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Basic Machine Description of Functions (Part 1) (09.01 Edition)
(the books contained therein are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC20-0BP1
A2
A3
B1
B2
D1
D2
F1
G2
H2
K1
K2
K4
N2
P1
P3
R1
S1
V1
W1

/FB2/

Various interface signals


Axis monitoring, protection zones
Continuous-path mode, exact stop and look ahead
Acceleration
Diagnostic tool
Interactive programming
Travel to fixed stop
Speeds, setpoint/actual value systems, closed-loop control
Auxiliary function output at the PLC
Mode group, channel, program operation
Axes, coordinate systems, frames,
actual-value system for workpiece, external zero offset
Communication
EMERGENCY STOP
Transverse axes
Basic PLC program
Reference point approach
Spindles
Feed rates
Tool compensation

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2)
Description of Extended Functions (Part 2) (09.01 Edition)
including FM NC: Turning, stepper motor
(the books contained therein are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC30-0BP1

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

B-195

B References

12.01

A4
B3
B4
F3
H1
K3
K5
L1
M1
M5
N3
N4
P2
P5
R2
S3
S5
S6
S7
T1
W3
W4

/FB3/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2)
Basic Machine Description of Functions (Part 3) (09.01 Edition)
(the books contained therein are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC80-0BP1
F2
G1
G3
K6
M3
S8
T3
TE1
TE2
TE3
TE4
TE5
TE6
TE7
TE8
V2
W5

/FBA/

3 to 5-axis transformation
Gantry axes
Cycle times
Contour tunnel monitoring
Coupled axes and ESR
Constant tool speed for centerless grinding
Tangential control
Clearance control
Analog axis
Speed/torque linking, master/slave
Handling transformation package
Setpoint exchange
MCS coupling
Retrace support
Cycle-independent path-synchronized switching signal output
Preprocessing
3D tool radius compensation

SIMODRIVE 611D/SINUMERIK 840D/810D


Description of Drive Functions
(the chapters included therein are listed below)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA80-0BP7
DB1
DD1
DD2
DE1
DF1
DG1

B-196

Digital and analog NCK I/Os


Various operator panels and NCUs
Operator action via PG/PC
Remote diagnosis
Manual travel and handwheel travel
Compensation
Mode groups, channels, axis replacement
FM NC local bus
Kinematic transformation
Measuring
Software cam(s), limit signals
Punching and nibbling
Positioning axes
Reciprocation
Axes of rotation
Synchronous spindle
Synchronized actions (up to SW 3)
Stepper motor control
Memory configuration
Indexing axes
Tool change
Grinding

(09.01 Edition)

Event messages/alarm responses


Diagnostic functions
Speed control loop
Enhanced drive functions
Enabling
Encoder parameterization

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

B References

12.01

DL1
DM1
DS1
D1

/FBAN/

/FBD/

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital


Description of Functions
ANA Module
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB80-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D
Description of Functions Digitizing
Order No.: 6FC5 297-4AC50-0BP0
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4

/FBDN/

/FBDT/

/FBFA/

/FBFE/

/FBMA/

(02.00 Edition)

(07.99 Edition)

Installation and Startup


Scanning by tactile sensor (scancad scan)
Scanning by laser (scancad laser)
Creating a milling program (scancad mill)

IT Solutions
NC data management server (DNC NT-2000)
Description of functions
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AE50-0BP1

IT Solutions
NC data transmission (SinDNC)
Description of functions
Order No.: 6FC5 297-1AE70-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Description of Functions
ISO Dialect for SINUMERIK
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE10-0BP1

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Description of Functions Remote Diagnosis
Order No.: 6FC5 297-0AF00-0BP1
FE1
FE2

/FBHLA/

Linear motor MD
Calculating motor/power section parameters and controller data
Current control loop
Monitoring/limitations

(05.00 Edition)

(03.01 Edition)

(09.01 Edition)

(09.01 Edition)

Remote diagnosis
Interrupt-driven notification by e-mail: @Event

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital


Description of Functions
HLA Module
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB60-0BP2

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Description of Functions ManualTurn
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AD50-0BP1

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

(04.00 Edition)

(08.00 Edition)

B-197

B References

/FBO/

12.01

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Description of functions
Configuration User Interface OP 030
(the chapters contained therein are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC40-0BP0
BA
EU
PS
PSE
IK

/FBP/

/FBR/

(09.01 Edition)

Operator guide
Development environment (configuring package)
online only: Configuring syntax (configuring package)
Introduction to configuring the user interface
Screen kit: Software update and configuration

SINUMERIK 840D
Description of Functions C PLC Programming
Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AB60-0BP0

(03.96 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
IT solutions
Computer link (SinCOM)
Description of functions
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AD60-0BP0

(04.00 Edition)

NFL
NPL

Interface to the host computer


Interface to PLC/NCK

/FBSI/

SINUMERIK 840D / SIMODRIVE 611 digital


Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (03.01 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AB80-0BP0

/FBSP/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Description of Functions ShopMill
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD80-0BP0

/FBST/

SIMATIC
FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEP
Description of Functions
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA70-0YP4

/FBT/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Description of Functions ShopTurn
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD70-0BP0

/FBSY/

B-198

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2)
Description of Functions Synchronized Actions
for wood, glass, ceramics, presses
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD40-0BP1

(10.01 Edition)

(01.01 Edition)

(03.01 Edition)

(09.01 Edition)

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

B References

12.01

/FBTD/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
IT solutions
Tool Data Information System (SinTDI) with online Help
Description of functions
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE00-0BP0

(03.01 Edition)

/FBU/

SIMODRIVE 611 universal


Description of Functions
(08.01 Edition)
Control Components for Closed-Loop Speed Control and Positioning
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB20-0BP4

/FBW/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Description of Functions Tool Management
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC60-0BP1

(10.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840Di
Manual
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE60-0BP0

(09.01 Edition)

/HBI/

/PJE/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Configuring Package HMI Embedded
(08.01 Edition)
Description of Functions : Software Update, Configuration, Installation
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6EA10-0BP0
(the publication PS Configuring Syntax is a component of the software consignment and is available as a pdf)

/PJFE/

SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Synchronous Integrated Motor 1FE1
Three-Phase Motors for Main Spindle Drives
(09.01 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AC00-0BP1

/PJLM/

SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Linear Motors
(06.01 Edition)
(on request)
ALL
General information on the linear motor
1FN1
Three-phase linear motor 1FN1
1FN3
Three-phase linear motor 1FN3
CON
Cables & Connections
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB70-0BP2

/PJM/

SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Motors
Three-phase A.C. motors for feed and
main spindle drives
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA20-0BP4

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

(09.00 Edition)

B-199

B References

/PJU/

12.01

SIMODRIVE 611
Planning Guide Converters
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA00-0BP5

(05.01 Edition)

/POS1/

SIMODRIVE POSMO A
(08.01 Edition)
Decentralized Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DP, Users Guide
Order No.: 6SN2197-0AA00-0BP3

/POS2/

SIMODRIVE POSMO A
Installation Guide (included with every POSMO A)
Order No.: 462 008 0815 00

(12.98 Edition)

/POS3/

SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA


Decentralized Servo Drive Technology, Users Guide
Order No.: 6SN2197-0AA20-0BP1

(08.01 Edition)

/S7H/

SIMATIC S7 300
(10.98 Edition)
Manual: Constructing, CPU Data (Hardware Description)
Reference Manual: Module Data
Order No.: 6ES7 398-8AA03-8AA0

/S7HT/

SIMATIC S7 300
Manual: STEP 7, Basic Knowledge, V. 3.1
Order No.: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8AA0

(03.97 Edition)

/S7HR/

SIMATIC S7 300
Manual: STEP 7, Reference Manuals, V. 3.1
Order No.: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8AR0

(03.97 Edition)

/S7S/

SIMATIC S7 300
Positioning Module FM 353 for Stepper Drive
Order together with the configuring package

(04.97 Edition)

/S7L/

SIMATIC S7 300
Positioning Module FM 354 for Servo Drive
Order together with the configuring package

(04.97 Edition)

/S7M/

SIMATIC S7 300
(01.01 Edition)
Multi-Axis Module FM 357.2 for Servo and Stepper Drives
Order together with the configuring package

/SP/

SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D,
SimoPro 3.1
Program for Configuring Machine Tool Drives
Order No.: 6SC6 111-6PC00-0AAj
Order from: Frth plant

B-200

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

B References

12.01

d) Installation and
start-up
/IAA/

SIMODRIVE 611A
Installation & Start-Up Guide
Order No.: 6SN 1197-0AA60-0BP6

(10.00 Edition)

/IAC/

SINUMERIK 810D
Installation & Start-Up Guide
(10.01 Edition)
(incl. description of the commissioning software SIMODRIVE
611D)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-4AD20-0BP1

/IAD/

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D


Installation & Start-Up Guide
(09.01 Edition)
(incl. description of the commissioning software SIMODRIVE
611D)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AB10-0BP1

/IAF/

SINUMERIK FM-NC
Installation & Start-Up Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AB00-0BP1

(07.00 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
HMI/MMC Installation & Start-Up Guide
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE20-0BP1

(11.01 Edition)

/IAM/

AE1
BE1
HE1
IM2
IM4
TX1

Updates/options
Supplementing the user interface
Online Help
Installation & Start-Up HMI Embedded
Installation & Start-Up HMI Advanced
Creating foreign language texts

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

B-201

B References

12.01

Notes

B-202

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

Index
Functions, toolspecific, 8-89

Access protection, 12-161


Access protection features, 12-162
Access rights, 12-161
Access softkeys, 13-169
Application disks, 2-18
installing on PC card, 2-20
installing on PC/PG, 2-19

Hardware
assembly, 1-13
basic components, 1-13
operator components, 1-13
system assembly, 1-13
HEADER.INI, 13-184

I
B
Basic components, 1-13

C
CLAMP.SPF, 13-178
Configuration file, 9-112
examples, 9-112
variables, 9-115
Coolant, 8-93
Customer booting display, 13-167
Cycles, user-configured, 13-169
Cycles support, 13-183
Cylinder surface transformation, 13-172
axis configuration, 13-173
groove wall offset, 13-172

Initial start-up, 2-19


Input signals, 5-47
Interface DB82, 4-42
Interface signals, 5-47
Interface signals for ShopMill, 4-45
Interlocking logic, 4-43
ISO dialects, 13-179

K
Keyswitch, 12-164

L
Lockable data areas, 12-165

Data blocks, 4-40


DB71, 9-123
DB72, 9-125
DB82, 4-42
Default password, 12-163
Diagnostic buffer signals, 5-49, 5-67
Diagnostics function for NC signals, 4-44
Display machine data, 6-74

M functions, 8-94
Machine control panel, 1-15
MCP 19, 1-15
OP032S, 1-16
Machine Data, 6-69
Machine data
display, 6-72
measuring cycles, 10-151
NC, 6-69
Manual tools, 8-92
Measuring cycles, 10-143
display machine data, 10-152
functional check, 10-146
I/O interface, 10-145
probe machine data, 10-151
Multiple clamping, 13-178

F
FB110, 9-121
FC100, 9-121
FC30...35, 4-41
FC90, 4-41
Function blocks, 4-39

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

C-203

C Index

12.01

N
NC machine data
exact value assignment, 6-69
mnimum value assignment, 6-69
variable value assignment, 6-69
Network, 11-157
Network drive, linking, 11-158

O
OB1, 4-36
OB100, 4-38
OP hotkeys, 13-186
Operator components, 1-13
Output signals, 5-48

P
Password, 12-163
reset, 12-163
set, 12-163
PC card
creating, 2-20
loading, 2-21
PLC
diagnostic buffer signals, 5-49
interface signals, 5-47
program, 4-35
program structure, 4-35
sample calls, 4-36
ShopMill interface DB 82, 5-47
toolbox disks, 2-18
PLC keys, 13-186
Probe connection, 10-144
Programs, generated automatically, 13-181
Protection levels, 12-165

R
Reserved Functions, 7-87

S
Screen form, user-configured, 13-169
Series start-up, 2-31
ShopMill, 4-42
ShopMill Classic, 2-22
ShopMill interface DB 82, 5-51
ShopMill Open, 13-182

C-204

ShopMill PLC program, 4-41


Software installation
application disks, 2-18
system disks, 2-18
Software start-up, 2-17
data communication, 2-17
ShopMill, 2-17
Spindle, 8-93
Spindle control, 13-180
Start-up
initial, 2-19
measuring cycles, 10-148
NC, 2-27
PLC, 2-29
series, 2-31
software, 2-17
Starting up
PCU 20, 2-19
PCU 50, 2-22
Status display, 13-184
Supplementary conditions, 3-33
Swivel cycle, 13-177
Swivel heads, 13-176
Swivel tables, 13-176
System disks, 2-18
installing on PC/PG, 2-19

T
Texts, toolspecifc, 8-96
to_mill.ini, 9-136
Tool change, adapting, 8-90
Tool Changes, 8-89
Tool list, coolant and direction of rotation, 8-93
Tool management, 9-101
blocks, 9-121
configuring the operator interface, 9-136
display machine data, 9-118
examples, 9-130
NC machine data, 9-105
NC start-up, 9-104
overview of functions, 9-101
PLC start-up, 9-119
Toolchanging cycle, 8-90
Tool-specific functions, 8-94
Toolbox disks, 2-18
TRACYL, 13-172

U
User screenform, 13-169
User status display, 13-184

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) 12.01 Edition

SIEMENS AG

Suggestions
Corrections

A&D MC BMS
P.O. Box 3180

For Publication/Manual:

SINUMERIK 840D/810D

D--91050 Erlangen (Germany)


(Tel. 0180 / 5050 -- 222 [Hotline]
Fax +49 (0) 9131/98 --2176
email: motioncontrol.docu@erlf.siemens.de)

Manufacturer/Service Documentation
Description of Functions

From

Order No.:
Edition:

Name
Company/Department

6FC5297-6AD80-0BP0
12.01

Sould you come across any printing errors


when reading this publication, please notify us
on this sheet.
Suggestions for improvement are also welcome.

Address

Telephone:

Telefax:

Suggestions and/or corrections

ShopMill

Documentation overview SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (09.01)


General Documentation

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

840D/810D

840D/840Di/
810D/

Sales brochure

Catalog
Ordering NC 60 *)

User Documentation
SINUMERIK
SIROTEC
SIMODRIVE
Accessories

Catalog
of accessories
NC-Z

User Documentation

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/
810D

840D/810D

Programming Guide
-- Short Guide
-- Fundamentals *)
-- Production Planning *)
-- Cycles
-- Measuring cycles
-- ISO Turning/Milling

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

840D/810D/
FM NC

840D/810D

840D/840Di/
810D

840D/840Di/
810D

AutoTurn
-- Short Guide
-- Programming (1)
-- Setup (2)

Operators Guide
-- HT 6 (+ 840Di)
-- HPU
-- Unit control panel

Diagnostics
Guide *)

Operators Guide *)
-- Short Guide
-- BA MMC103
-- BA HMI Embedded
-- BA HMI Advanced

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK
840Di

Operators Guide System overview


-- ManualTurn
-- Short Guide ManualTurn
-- ShopMill
-- Short Guide ShopMill
-- Shop Turn
--Short Guide Shop Turn

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

840D/810D

840D/840Di/
810D

840D/810D

Function. desc.
-- ManualTurn
-- ShopMill

Function. desc.
Synchronized
actions

Function. desc.
-- Computer link
-- Tool Data
Information System

SINUMERIK

Configuration
(hardware) *)
-- FM NC
-- 810D
-- 840D

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/
810D

611D
840D/810D

840D/840Di/
810D

840D/810D

840D/810D

840D/840Di/
810D

840D/810D

Operator
components
(hardware) *)

Function. desc.
Drive function *)

Function. desc.
-- Basic machine *)
-- Expansion funct.
-- Special functions

Configuring Pack
MMC100/101
-- Configuring syntax
-- Development env.

Installation Pack
MMC100/101
SW update and
configuration

Function. desc.
Tool management

Function. desc.
Config. user
interface OP 030

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE

SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE

SINUMERIK
840D

Function. desc.
SINUMERIK
Safety Integrated

Function. desc.
Digitizing

Installation and
Start-up Guide *)
-- FM NC
-- 810D
-- 840D/611D
-- MMC/HMI

SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
840D/840Di
810D
611D

Lists*)

SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
840D
611D

Function. desc.
Linear motor

SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
840D
611D

EMC Guidelines
Function. desc.
-- Hydraulics module
-- Analog module

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

Electronic Documentation
SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
840D/840Di/
810D
611, motors

DOC ON CD *)
The SINUMERIK system

*) Recommended minimum documentation requirement

SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/
810D

Function. desc.
ISO dialects for
SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK
840Di

Manual
(hardware +
installation
and start-up)

SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
SIROTEC

SINUMERIK
840D/810D

Function. desc.
Remote diagnosis

Potrebbero piacerti anche